8
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
KH USA FOREWORD:2016 12/28/2016 3:34 PM Page 1
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2017 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia MOTORS
AMERICA, Inc.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
KH USA FOREWORD:2016 12/28/2016 3:34 PM Page 2
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process /
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
Smart key / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors /
Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transmission / Brake system /
Cruise control system / Advanced Smart Cruise Control system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / Parking
brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
Table of contents
KH USA FOREWORD:2016 12/28/2016 3:34 PM Page 3
1
Introduction
How to use this manual......................................1-2
Fuel requirements...............................................1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol.............1-3
• Do not use methanol...............................................1-4
• Fuel Additives..........................................................1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ..1-6
KH USA 1:2016 12/1/2016 9:43 PM Page 1
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. To help minimize the
chance of death or injury, you must
read the WARNING and CAUTION
sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all located in
the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to help
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL proce-
dures and recommendations provid-
ed in these instructions.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
1-2
Introduction
A WARNING indicates a situa-
tion in which harm, serious bod-
ily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
WARNING
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
CAUTION
KH USA 1:2016 12/1/2016 9:43 PM Page 2
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
3.8 engine
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number (R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.(Do
not use methanol blended fuels)
5.0 engine
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.(Do
not use methanol blended fuels)
For improved vehicle performance,
premium unleaded fuel with an
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or
higher is recommended.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than what
has been specified. (Consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer for details.)
Tighten the cap until it clicks once.
otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle. Do not
use gasohol containing more than
15% ethanol, and do not use gaso-
line or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results. Methanol may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine con-
trol system and emission control sys-
tem. Discontinue using gasohol of
anykind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer's warranty if they result
from the use of:
1.Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2.Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Introduction
1
1-3
Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
WARNING
KH USA 1:2016 12/1/2016 9:43 PM Page 3
3.Gasohol containing more than 15
percent ethanol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compat-
ible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
mends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
ing 15 percent.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to
the fuel system or any performance
problems caused by the use of “E85”
fuel.
✽ NOTICE
Never use any fuel containing
methanol. Discontinue use of any
methanol containing product which
may inhibit proper drivability.
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-
ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-
ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful man-
ganese-based fuel additives such as
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Kia does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission
control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
1-4
Introduction
KH USA 1:2016 12/1/2016 9:43 PM Page 4
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which helps
prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com).
For Customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles
or every engine oil change is recom-
mended. Additives are available from
your authorized K900 Kia dealer
along with information on how to use
them. Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
Introduction
1
1-5
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
KH USA 1:2016 12/1/2016 9:43 PM Page 5
1-6
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
KH USA 1:2016 12/1/2016 9:43 PM Page 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview................................................2-2
Interior overview .................................................2-4
Instrument panel overview..................................2-5
Engine compartment ..........................................2-7
2
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:32 PM Page 1
2-2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood......................................................4-35
2. Head lamp...........................................4-131
3. Fog lamp .............................................4-135
4. Tire and wheel ..............................7-54, 8-5
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-63
6. Panoramic Sunroof................................4-40
7. Front windshield wiper blades....4-136, 7-47
8. Windows................................................4-31
OKH015001N
■ Front view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:32 PM Page 2
Your vehicle at a glance
2
2-3
9. Door.......................................................4-16
10. Fuel filler lid.........................................4-37
11. Rear combination lamp.......................7-93
12. Trunk lid...............................................4-25
13. High mounted stop lamp.....................7-94
14. Rear window defroster......................4-143
15. Parking assist system .......................4-118
16. Antenna.............................................4-182
17. Rearview camera ..............................4-122
OKH015002N
■ Rear view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:32 PM Page 3
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Inside door handle...................................4-17
2. Front power seat adjust switch..................3-5
3. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-65
4. Outside rearview mirror control...............4-64
5. Power window lock switch.......................4-34
6. Central door lock switch ..........................4-18
7. Power window switch...............................4-32
8. BSD On/OFF button................................5-87
9. HUD On/OFF button..............................4-116
10. Parking Assist button...........................4-118
11. ESC Off button ......................................5-43
12. Trunk lid open button.......................4-21, 22
13. Trunk lid close button.......................4-21, 22
14. Trunk lid open / close button..................4-22
15. Instrument panel illumination control
lever........................................................4-68
16. Electric parking brake switch.................5-31
17. Fuel filler lid open switch.......................4-37
18. Hood release lever.................................4-35
19. Steering wheel.......................................4-45
20. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ...4-45
21. Brake pedal............................................5-28
22. Accelerator pedal ....................................5-9
OKH013003N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:32 PM Page 4
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Your vehicle at a glance
2
2-5
1. Instrument cluster..............................4-67
2. Horn...................................................4-47
3. Driver's front air bag..........................3-52
4. Engine start/stop button......................5-6
5. Audio / Video / Navigation...............4-181
6. Climate control system....................4-144
7. Clock................................................4-174
8. Hazard warning flasher .......................6-2
9. Passenger's front air bag...................3-52
10. Glove box.......................................4-165
11. SBC(Shift by cable) control lever.....5-11
12. SBW(Shift by wire) control lever......5-16
13. Drive mode button...........................5-54
14. Auto hold button ..............................5-37
15. Electric parking brake switch...........5-31
16. DIS central key..............................4-181
17. Front blind spot monitoring system
On/Off button.................................4-126
18. Rear curtain folding button............4-178
19. Surround View Monitoring System
On/Off button.................................4-127
20. Snow mode button ..........................5-54
21. Center console storage box ..........4-164
OKH015004N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:33 PM Page 5
2-6
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Audio remote control buttons ..............4-183
2. Bluetooth hands free buttons..............4-182
3. LDWS On/Off button .............................5-82
4. Heated steering wheel On/Off button....4-46
5. Light control / Turn signals lever..........4-130
6. Wiper and washer control lever...........4-136
7. LCD display control...............................4-68
8. Advanced Smart Cruise Control switch
(vehicle to vehicle distance setting) ......5-72
9. Cruise control switch / Advanced Smart
Cruise Control Switch ...................5-63/5-68
OKH015005N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:33 PM Page 6
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Your vehicle at a glance
2
2-7
1. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-32
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-33
3. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-34
4. Radiator cap .....................................7-36
5. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-38
6. Power steering fluid reservoir...........7-39
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-46
8. Air cleaner.........................................7-41
9. Fuse box...........................................7-70
10. Jumper terminal................................6-5
OKH015008N
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■
3.8L Engine
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:33 PM Page 7
2-8
Your vehicle at a glance
OKH013006N
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-34
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-36
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-38
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-41
5. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-38
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-33
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-40
8. Fuse box...........................................7-70
9. Power steering fluid reservoir...........7-39
10. Jumper terminal................................6-5
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■ 5.0L Engine
KH USA 2:2016 4/21/2017 1:33 PM Page 8
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seat ...................................................................3-2
• Front seat adjustment..............................................3-5
• Driver position memory system...............................3-8
• Headrest (for front seat)..........................................3-9
• Rear seat adjustment............................................3-14
Seat belts..........................................................3-21
• Seat belt restraint system......................................3-21
• Pre-tensioner seat belt .........................................3-27
• Pre-active Seat belt (PSB)....................................3-29
• Seat belt precautions ............................................3-30
• Care of seat belts..................................................3-32
Child restraint system.......................................3-33
• Using a child restraint system...............................3-34
• Tether anchor system ...........................................3-37
• Lower anchor system............................................3-38
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system
........................................................................3-40
• How does the air bag system operate..................3-41
• Air bag warning light .............................................3-43
• SRS components and functions............................3-44
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) ......................3-46
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag ..................3-52
• Side air bag...........................................................3-54
• Curtain air bag ......................................................3-56
• SRS Care..............................................................3-62
• Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-
equipped Vehicle...................................................3-62
• Air bag warning label ............................................3-63
3
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:33 AM Page 1
3-2
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward**/ Seat height and cushion
tilting adjustment
(2) Seat cushion length adjustment
(3) Seatback angle adjustment
(4) Headrest height adjustment
(5) Driver position memory system
(6) Lumbar support adjustment*
Front passenger’s seat
(7) Seat sliding forward or backward/
Seat height and cushion tilting
adjustment*
(8) Seatback angle adjustment
(9) Headrest height adjustment
Rear seat
(10) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward adjustment with seatback
angle adjustment
(11) Easy access button
(12) Front passenger’s seat forward
and rearward*
SEAT
OKH033001N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:33 AM Page 2
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-3
(13) Front passenger’s seat back
angle*
(14) Lumber support adjustment*
(15) Rear lock button
(16) Headrest
(17) Armrest
(18) Ski through*
*: if equipped
**: The height of the driver's headrest
is automatically adjusted simulta-
neously with the driver's seat slid-
ing adjustment operation.
Loose objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING
Driver responsibility for
passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
WARNING
OKH033107N
Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
WARNING
Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
This could result in loss of
control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against the seatback could
result in serious or fatal injury
in a sudden stop or collision.
(Continued)
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 3
Feature of Seat Leather
• Leather is made from the outer skin
of an animal, which goes through a
special process to be available for
use. Since it is a natural substance,
each part differs in thickness or
density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature and
humidity.
• The seat is made of stretchable fab-
ric to improve comfort.
• The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driving
comfort and stability.
• Wrinkles may appear naturally from
usage. It is not a fault of the product.
3-4
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while
still maintaining comfortable
control of your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do
so could result in air bag infla-
tion injuries to the driver.
Seat adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING
Small Objects
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing up small objects trapped
under the seats or between the
seat and the center console.
Your hands might be cut or
injured by the sharp edges of
the seats mechanism.
WARNING
Seatback pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 4
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-5
✽ NOTICE
Wrinkles or abrasions which appear
naturally from usage are not cov-
ered by warranty.
Front seat adjustment - power
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the doors. Before driving, adjust the
seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instru-
ment panel.
Unattended children
Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
WARNING
Seating Position
To reduce the risk of injury in a
crash, both drivers and passen-
gers should always sit as far
back as possible in the upright
position with the seatbelt prop-
erly secured.
WARNING
• Belts with metallic acces-
sories, zippers or keys inside
your back pants pocket may
damage the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which con-
tain bleach may contaminate
the surface of the seat cover-
ing fabric and cause damage
or discoloration.
CAUTION
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 5
3-6
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
When in operation, the power seat
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than neces-
sary while the engine is not running.
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
OKH033002N OKH032005N
Power seat adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equip-
ment.
CAUTION
Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor
or electrical components.
CAUTION
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 6
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-7
Seat cushion height
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion. Pull
the rear portion of the control switch
up to raise or down to lower the rear
part of the seat cushion. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Lumbar support
(for front seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support switch
on the side of the front seat. Press the
front portion of the switch (1) to
increase support, or the rear portion
of the switch (2), to decrease support.
Move the support position up and
down by pressing the switch (3) or (4).
Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Cushion length adjustment
(for driver’s seat)
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat cushion
to the desired length. Release the
switch once the seat cushion reach-
es the desired length.
OKH033006N
OKH033007N OKH033004N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 7
3-8
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Driver position memory system
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat, outside rearview mirror,
HUD* (Head-Up Display), bright
ness of the instrument cluster illumi-
nation and steering wheel positions
with a simple button operation.
* : if equipped
By saving the desired positions into
the system memory, different drivers
can reposition the driver seat, out-
side rearview mirror and steering
wheel based upon their driving pref-
erence. If the battery is disconnect-
ed, the position memory will be lost
and the driving positions should be
restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1.Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) and the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in the ON position.
2.Adjust the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror, HUD* (Head-up
Display), bright ness of the instru-
ment cluster illumination and steer-
ing wheel to positions comfortable
for the driver.
3.Press the SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4.Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
* : if equipped
OKH043039N
Driver position memory
system
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 8
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-9
Recalling positions from memory
1 Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) and the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in the ON position.
2.To recall the position in memory,
press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror and steering wheel
will automatically adjust to the
stored positions.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver seat while the system is recall-
ing the stored position will cause the
movement to stop and move in the
direction that the control switch is
moved.
Use caution when recalling adjust-
ment memory while sitting in the
vehicle. Push the seat position con-
trol switch to the desired position
immediately if the seat moves too far
in any direction.
Easy access function
When exiting the vehicle, the steer-
ing wheel will move away from the
driver and the seat will move rear-
ward when the engine is turned off.
When entering the vehicle, the steer-
ing wheel will move toward the driver
and the seat will move forward when
the Engine Start/Stop Button is
pressed to the ACC position or START
position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
chapter 4.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and com-
fort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passen-
ger, but also helps protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
OKH033109N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 9
3-10
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or rearward by pulling the lower
part of the headrest forward or rear-
ward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
✽ NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
OKH033010N
Headrest removal/adjust-
ment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests help provide criti-
cal neck and head support in
a crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
WARNING
OYFH034205
Excessive pulling or pushing
may damage the headrest.
CAUTION
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 10
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-11
Adjusting the height up and down
For manual type
To raise the headrest
1.Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest
1.Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2.Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
For power type
To raise the headrest
1. Push the control switch up (1).
To lower the headrest
2. Push the control switch down (2).
Release the switch once the head-
rest reaches the desired position.
Removal
1.Recline the seatback (2) with the
recliner control switch (1).
OKH033011N
OKH033095NOKH033008N
Headrest Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 11
3-12
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
For manual type
2.Raise it as far as it can go.
3.Press the release button (3) while
pulling upward (4).
For power type
1.Raise it as far as it can go by
pulling the switch up (3).
2.Pull the headrest up (4).
Installation
1.Recline the seatback (2) with the
recliner control switch (1).
OKH033096N OKH033098N
OKH033100N
Headrest Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the head rest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 12
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-13
For manual type
2.Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (4).
3.Recline the seatback (6) with the
recliner control switch (5).
4.Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
For power type
2.Raise it as far as it can go by
pulling the switch up (3).
3.Put the headrest poles (4) into the
holes and then pull the switch
down (5) until the headrest moves
to the lowest position.
4.To install the headrest securely,
move the headrest up and down 2
or 3 times by pulling the switch up
and down.
5.Recline the seatback (7) with the
recliner control switch (6).
6.Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
Electronic active headrest
The electronic active headrest is
designed to move the headrest for-
ward and upward when impact sen-
sor detects a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and
front passenger’s heads from moving
backward during a collision.
✽ NOTICE
Do not damage the Active Headrest.
Headrests can provide critical neck
and head support in a crash.
OKH033102N OKH033110NOKH033101N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 13
3-14
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Rear seat adjustment
- for power seat (if equipped)
The rear seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the door.
When in operation, the power seat
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
battery drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
Seat adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat when adjusting the
seat. Your hand could get
caught in the seat mecha-
nism.
WARNING
Do not operate the rear power
seat while the child seat is
installed. Operation of the rear
power seats affect the proper
car seat installation and thereby
increase the risk of injury to the
child seat occupant.
WARNING
Power seat adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equip-
ment.
CAUTION
Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor
or electrical components.
CAUTION
Unattended children
Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 14
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-15
Forward, backward and seatback
angle (for power seat)
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Easy access switch
(for power seat)
Your vehicle features an easy access
system to provide convenient access
for rear passengers. When opening
the rear door, the rear seats will
move rearward automatically to pro-
vide easier access for passengers.
This easy access system will operate
only when the control switch is in
"ON" position.
Additional switches for adjusting
the front seat (if equipped)
• Front passenger’s seat
The switch is located on the left side
of the front passenger’s seatback.
To adjust the position of front pas-
senger’s seat ;
Press the control switch forward (1)
or rearward (2)to move the seat to
the desired position. Press the con-
trol switch forward (3) or rearward (4)
to move the seatback to the desired
angle.
Do not use these switches while the
front passenger seat is occupied.
OKH033035N OKH033036N
OKH035022N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 15
3-16
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
• Rear seat
The switch is located in the armrest
of the rear seat.
To adjust the position of front pas-
senger’s seat ;
Press the control switch forward (1)
or rearward (2) to move the seat to
the desired position.
Press the control switch forward (3)
or rearward (4) to move the seatback
to the desired angle.
Do not use these switches while the
front passenger seat is occupied.
Lumbar support
(for rear right and left passenger’s
seat) (if equipped)
• For right side :
Press the R switch.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pushing the lumbar support lever.
Push the lever to left side (1) increase
support or push the lever to the right
side (2) to decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, push the lever upside (3) or
down side (4).
• For left side :
Press the L switch.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pushing the lumbar support lever.
Push the lever to left side (1) increase
support or push the lever to the right
side (2) to decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, push the lever upside (3) or
down side (4).
OKH033037N
OKH033032N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 16
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-17
Rear switches operating limitation
You can activate or deactivate the
rear seat control, rear audio control
and climate control by using the
REAR LOCK button on the rear arm-
rest or “System Settings” in the AVN
(Audio, Video, and Navigation).
Detailed information for the “System
Settings” is described in a separately
supplied manual.
If the rear control button has deacti-
vated through AVN, you can reacti-
vate the rear control button only
through AVN.
Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
OKH033111N
OKH033040N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 17
3-18
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and installation
(for power seat)
To remove the headrest move the
seat forward as much as possible.
Raise it as far as it can go then press
the release button (1) while pulling
the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest move the
seat forward as much as possible.
Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release but-
ton (1). Then adjust it to the appro-
priate height (2).
OKH033026NOKH033024N
Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed.
Headrests may provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
WARNING
Headrest Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 18
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-19
Rear center seat headrest
You can fold the rear center seat’s
headrest by pressing the upper part
of the headrest while pushing the
button (1).
To use the headrest, pull up the
upper part of the headrest.
✽ NOTICE
Operating the vehicle with the head-
rest in the folded position does not
provide the vehicle occupant with
the optimal neck and head support
in the event of a crash.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or backward by pulling the
lower part of the headrest forward or
backward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
Wing-out (if equipped)
For rear outboard passenger's com-
fort, the ends of the headrest can be
adjusted inward.
OKH033039NOKH033106NOKH033103N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 19
3-20
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Carrying long / narrow cargo
(for fixed seat, if equipped)
Additional cargo space is provided to
accommodate long/narrow cargo
(skis, poles, etc.) not able to fit prop-
erly in the trunk when closed.
1. Pull the armrest down.
2. Pull the cover down while pushing
the release lever down.
OKH033076N
OKH033027N
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear passen-
ger seats to prevent damage to
the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from mov-
ing while driving. Unsecured
cargo in the passenger com-
partment can cause damage to
the vehicle.
CAUTION
Cargo
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects on the rear seats,
since they cannot be properly
secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 20
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-21
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the
pelvis, chest and shoulders as appli-
cable. wearing the lap section of the
belt across the abdominal area must
be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
SEAT BELTS
Shoulder belt
Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt cannot protect the
occupant in a crash.
WARNING
Damaged seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING
Twisted seat belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING
Seat belt buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:34 AM Page 21
3-22
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
(for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate to the follow-
ing table when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in "ON" position.
The driver seat belt warning light and
chime will activate during following
situations.
• The warning light and chime will
activate for 6 seconds when the
seat belt is not buckled and the
Engine Start/Stop button is in ON.
• The warning light will activate for 6
seconds when the seat belt is
buckled and the Engine Start/Stop
button is in ON.
• If the driver seat belt is buckled and
then unbuckled during driving
- If the vehicle speed is below 3
mph (5 km/h), the warning light
will illuminate for 6 seconds.
- If the vehicle speed is between 3
mph (5 km/h) ~ 6 mph (10 km/h),
the warning light and sound will
activate for 6 seconds.
- If the vehicle speed is over 6 mph
(10 km/h), the warning light and
sound will activate for 6 seconds.
And repeat 11 times with 24 sec-
onds of interval.
• If the driver seat belt has not been
buckled at all during driving
- If the vehicle speed is over 6 mph
(10 km/h), the warning light and
sound will activate for 6 seconds.
And repeat 11 times with 24 sec-
onds of interval.
- If the vehicle speed is below 3
mph (5 km/h), the warning light
and sound will turn off within
6seconds.
- If the seat belt has been buckled
during driving, the warning light
will turn off within 6 seconds. The
warning sound will deactivate
immediately.
WKH-001
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 22
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-23
Seat belt warning
(for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light will activate to the fol-
lowing table when the Engine
Start/Stop button is in "ON" position.
The passenger seat belt warning
light will activate during following sit-
uations.
• The warning light will illuminate for
6 seconds if the Engine Start/Stop
button is in ON, regardless of
whether the seat belt is buckled or
not.
• If the driver seat belt is buckled and
then unbuckled during driving
- If the vehicle speed is over 6 mph
(10 km/h), the warning light will
not activate.
- If the vehicle speed is less than 3
mph (5 km/h), the warning light
will turn off when speed is over 6
mph (10 km/h).
- The warning light will not activate
if the vehicle speed is less than 6
mph (10 km/h) when the seatbelt
is unbuckled.
• If the passenger seat belt has not
been buckled at all during driving
- If the vehicle speed is over 6 mph
(10 km/h), the warning light will
illuminate continuously.
✽ NOTICE
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front passen-
ger's seat belt warning system. It is
important for the driver to instruct
the passenger as to the proper seat-
ing instructions as contained in this
manual.
• You can find the front passenger's
seat belt warning light on the cen-
ter fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat
is not occupied, the seat belt warn-
ing light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can
blink when a briefcase or purse is
placed on the front passenger
seat.
OKH035104N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 23
3-24
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean for-
ward too quickly.
✽ NOTICE
If you are unable to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull
the belt out and release it. Then you
will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4
positions for maximum comfort and
safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
OKH033113N
OKH033112N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 24
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-25
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
Improperly positioned seat belts can
cause serious injuries in an accident.
You should place the lap belt portion
as low as possible and snugly across
your hips. If the lap belt is located too
high on your waist, it may increase
the chance of injury in the event of a
collision.
The arm closest to the seat belt
buckle should be over the belt while
the other arm should be under the
belt as shown in the illustration.
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place an infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor
Type). It automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt
portion of the seat belt is adjusted
OKH033114N
Shoulder belt positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING
Seat belt replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 25
3-26
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
manually so that it fits snugly around
your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this chapter.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) of the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
OKH033115NOKH033045N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 26
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-27
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The retractor pre-tensioner is a
supplemental system of the seat
belts.
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD) is a supplemental system of
the seat belts.
The purpose of the EFD is to make
sure that the pelvis belts fit in tight-
ly against the occupant's lower
body in certain frontal collisions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
Do not put anything near the
buckle. Placing objects near the
buckle may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING
OXMA033101
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 27
3-28
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown
in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1.The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow all
of the important information and
precautions about your vehicle’s
occupant safety features – includ-
ing seat belts and air bags – that
are provided in this manual.
2.Be sure you and your passengers
always wear seat belts properly.
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner
system may be activated not only
in certain frontal collision but also
in certain side collision or rollover,
if the vehicle is equipped with a
side or curtain air bag.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the Engine Start/Stop button
has been turned to the ON posi-
tion, and then it should turn off.
ODMESA2024
Skin Irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irrita-
tion and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 28
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-29
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
are not working properly, this warn-
ing light will illuminate even if there is
no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the Engine
Start/Stop button is turned ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized author-
ized K900 Kia dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After activa-
tion, pre-tensioner seat belts must
be replaced. All seat belts, of any
type, should always be replaced
after they have been worn during a
collision.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system
in any manner.
Pre-active Seat belt (PSB)
(if equipped)
The pre-active seat belt activates
only when the passenger is wearing
his/her seatbelt. It will activate and
pull the seat belt into tighter contact
against the occupant's body if a colli-
sion is detected or during certain
driving maneuvers.
✽ NOTICE
The pre-active seat belt activates
only when the passenger is wearing
his/her seat belt.
OKH033116N
Hot Pre-tensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tension-
er seat belt mechanism fires dur-
ing a collision the pretensioner
becomes hot and can burn you.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 29
3-30
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
The pre-active seat belt warning light
will illuminate if there is a problem
with your pre-active seat belt.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illumination
for approximately 3 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
The pre-active seat belt system
operates as below
• The seat belt is tightened when:
- The vehicle senses a collision
- Emergency braking situation
occurs
- Loss of vehicle control
• The seat belt vibrates when:
- The vehicle detects an object too
close to the vehicle
✽ NOTICE
During the activation of the pre-
active seat belt system, the seat belt
will vibrate. Do not be alarmed, as
this is the normal operation of the
system.
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint
laws. You should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state.
Child and/or infant seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. For more information
about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
chapter.
OKH045515N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 30
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-31
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occu-
py the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion
should be fastened snug on the hips
and as low as possible. Periodically
check belt fit. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are given the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over
age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be placed
in the rearmost position. Children age
12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE on the hips, not across
the abdomen.
Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate Child Restraint
System. If the shoulder belt
comes in contact with your
child's neck or face, your child
is too small to ride in the front
of the vehicle without a CRS.
The shoulder belt will cause
injury to your child's neck,
throat and face in the case of an
accident.
WARNING
Pregnant women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 31
3-32
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front
seats should be in an upright position
when the vehicle is moving. A seat
belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Pinched Seat belts
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing
/buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop.
WARNING
Seatbelts can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather. They could
burn infants and children.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 32
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-33
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children who are not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat
belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by seat
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or
LATCH anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car seat and seat
belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
When the child restraint system is not
in use, store it in the luggage area or
fasten it with a seat belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
Restraint location
Never install a child or infant seat
on the front passenger's seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
Hot child restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 33
3-34
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this chapter, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH033047N
Rear- facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
OKH033117N
Holding children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING
Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
WARNING
Unattended children
Never leave children unattend-
ed in a vehicle. The car can heat
up very quickly, resulting in
injuries to the child in the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 34
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-35
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child seat (as
described in the child seat system
manual), the headrest of the respec-
tive seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1.Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder
belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2.Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
Child seat installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufactur-
ers know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
result in the improper installa-
tion of the child restraint sys-
tem which may reduce the
protection to your child in a
crash or a sudden stop.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 35
3-36
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3.Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
4.Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is heard,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
5.Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6.Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt
is holding it firmly in place. If it is
not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7.Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
OEN036102 OEN036103 OEN036104
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 36
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-37
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each time a
child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchorage system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.
1.Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rest, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback. In case of interference
between the child restraint seat
and the headrest remove the par-
ticular head restraint for better fit-
ment of the child restraint seat.
OKH033108N
OKH033050N
OKH035048N
Auto lock mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system.
If the retractor is not in the Auto
Lock mode, the child restraint
can move when your vehicle
turns or stops suddenly.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 37
3-38
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
2.Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint hook
holder and tighten to secure the
child restraint seat.
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right rear seat backs
to indicate the position of the lower
anchors for child restraints.
OKH033118N
OKH033051N
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
WARNING
Unused rear seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 38
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-39
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro-
vided for the center rear seating
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
When you install your child's restraint
system using the LATCH anchors
buckle the shoulder lap belt, then
lock the retractor and pull the belt to
remove the slack in the belt so it lies
flat against the vehicle seat.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
✽ NOTICE -
Weight for LATCH
system
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65lb.
How to calculate the child restraint
weight :
Child restraint weight =
65lb - Child weight
LATCH lower anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 39
3-40
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OKH033079N
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 40
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-41
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to the ON or engine is running.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col-
lision (if equipped with side air bag
or curtain air bag) in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of complex factors includ-
ing vehicle speed, angles of impact
and the density and stiffness of the
vehicles or objects which your
vehicle hits in the collision. Though,
factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident. It is much more likely that
you will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which a
collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occu-
pant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering
wheel.
Airbag inflation
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do so
can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 41
3-42
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
to both the seat belt and the air bag,
as well as from breathing the smoke
and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possi-
ble after the impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to smoke and
powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic,They may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes,nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger’s seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after air bag infla-
tion. The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 42
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-43
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS).
When the Engine Start/Stop button
is turned ON, the indicator light
should illuminate for approximately 6
seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WKH-006
Air bag deployment
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats of a
vehicle equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags, install
the child restraint system as
far away from the door side as
possible. Inflation of the side
and/or curtain air bags could
impact the child.
• Do not install or place any
accessories near air bag
deployment areas, such as
the instrument panel, win-
dows, pillars, and roof rails.
Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the
air bag deploys.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 43
3-44
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the Engine
Start/Stop button is ON to determine
if a crash impact is severe enough to
require air bag deployment or pre-
tensioner seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to the ON
position, after which the air bag
warning light should go out.
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
K900 Kia dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
OKH033119N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 44
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-45
The air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
OKH033130N
Driver’s front air bag (2)
OKH033128N
Driver’s front air bag (3)
OKH033129N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:35 AM Page 45
3-46
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF
position. Never remove or replace
the air bag related fuse(s) when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ON position. Failure to heed this
warning will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
Occupant detection system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. The driver's front air bag is not
affected or controlled by the occu-
pant detection system.
OKH033132N
Passenger’s front air bag
OKH035105N
Air bag obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the air bag
deploys.
WARNING
Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 46
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-47
Main components of occupant
detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag sys-
tems should be activated or deac-
tivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of adult size, and
he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on the
floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator will turn off and the
front passenger's air bag will be able
to inflate, if necessary, in frontal
crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
ing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air
bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1)Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2)Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3)Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4)Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5)Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6)Reclining the seat back.
(7)Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
(8)Put on the seat an additional thick
cushion.
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 47
3-48
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system
*
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
: Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger
seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*
3
: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*
4
: The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without
child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket,
front seat cover or after market seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detec-
tion system.
Condition detected by the occupant
detection system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator light
SRS warning light
Front passenger air bag
1. Adult *
1
or child age 13 and up *
2
Off Off Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system with
12 months old *
3
*
4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 48
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-49
ODS system
Riding in an improper position adversely affects the occupant detection system (ODS) and may result in
the deactivation of front passenger air bag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.
OKH033126N
OKH033125N
OKH033123N
OKH033107N
OKH033124N
OKH033127N
• Never put a heavy load in
the front passenger seat.
• Never place the feet on
the front passenger seat-
back.
• Never sit with the hips
shifted towards the front
of the seat.
• Never excessively recline
the front passenger seat-
back.
• Never place the feet on
the dashboard.
• Never lean on the door or
center console.
• Never sit on one side of
the front passenger seat.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 49
3-50
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
OFF position and ask the passenger
to sit properly (sitting upright with the
seat back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the engine and have the per-
son remain in that position. This will
allow the system to detect the person
and to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the Engine Start/Stop
button is turned to the ON position
or after the engine is started. If the
front passenger seat is occupied, the
occupant detection sensor will then
classify the front passenger after
several more seconds.
OKH033131N
“AIR BAG OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a crash.
The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself
in the seat. Failure to properly
position yourself may lead to air
bag deactivation resulting in air
bag non-deployment in a colli-
sion. If the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator remains
illuminated after the passenger
repositions themselves proper-
ly and the car is restarted, it is
recommended that passenger
move to the rear seat because
the passenger's front air bag
will not deploy.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 50
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-51
✽ NOTICE
Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized K900 Kia dealer
replace the air bag immediately
after deployment.
Any child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large for
child restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No matter what
type of crash, children of all ages are
safer when restrained in the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat covers or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the pas-
senger's front air bag is connected
with the occupant detection system. If
there is a malfunction of the occupant
detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illu-
minate and the passenger's front air
bag will inflate in frontal impact crash-
es even if there is no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
ODS Interference
• Do not put a heavy load an
electronic device (ex. laptop
computer, after market DMB,
navigation, satellite audio,
video game machine, MP3, AC
inverter and etc.) or sitting mat
in the front passenger seat-
back pocket or on the front
passenger seat.
• Do not hang onto the front
passenger seat.
• Do not hang any items such as
seatback table on the front
passenger seatback.
• Do not place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
• Do not place any items under
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occu-
pant detection system, if they
puncture the seat cushion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not spill any liquids on the
seat. Any of the above could
interfere with the proper oper-
ation of the ODS sensor there-
by increasing the risk of an
injury in an accident.
WARNING
Seat Track Sensor
Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they
could damage the seat track
position sensor or interfere with
the occupant detection system.
CAUTION
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 51
3-52
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
The indications of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and the pas-
senger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's seat position, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restraint in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity,
seating position and seat belt usage,
the SRSCM (SRS Control Module)
controls the air bag inflation. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
OKH033053N
Driver’s front air bag
OKH033055N
Passenger’s front air bag
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 52
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-53
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
chapter.
Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the front
seat. These may cause a malfunction
of the seat track position sensor.
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Customer Assistance center at
1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-2847) or
1-800-333-4KIA (800-333-4542).
However, Kia does not endorse nor
will it support any changes to any
part or structure of the vehicle that
could affect the advanced air bag
system, including the occupant
detection system.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protec-
tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in colli-
sions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt alone.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front air
bags will not deploy in frontal crash-
es below the deployment threshold.
Modifications
Modification to the seat struc-
ture can cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.
WARNING
Replacement/Modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer using orig-
inal Kia parts designed for this
vehicle and model. Any other
such replacement or modifica-
tion could adversely affect the
operation of the occupant
detection system and your
advanced air bags.
WARNING
SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 53
3-54
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Side air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front and rear out-
board seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to pro-
vide the vehicle's driver and/or front
and rear outboard passenger with
additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollver sit-
uations.
The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute
for them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while the
vehicle is in operation.
■ Front
■ Rear
OKH033056N
OKH033081N
OKH033089N
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
No attaching objects
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stick-
ers) should be placed over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box. Such
objects could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the
air bags to deploy.
Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deploy-
ment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 54
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-55
For best protection from the side air
bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air bag,
both front seat occupants should sit
in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's
hands should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi-
tions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their laps.
If seat or seat cover is damaged, have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Inform that your vehicle is equipped
with side air bags and an occupant
detection system.
Unexpected deployment
Avoid impact to the side air bag
sensor when the Engine Start/ Stop
button is ON to prevent unexpected
deployment of the side air bag.
WARNING
No attaching objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not put any objects
between the side airbag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deploy-
ment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 55
3-56
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occu-
pants in certain side impact colli-
sions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact.
For vehicles equipped with a rollover
sensor the side and curtain air bags
on both sides of the vehicle may
deploy if a rollover or possible
rollover is detected.
The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
or rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window, or place
objects between the doors and pas-
sengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags.
✽ NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side curtain air bag
system. This should only be done by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH033082N
OKH033090N
No attaching objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as
the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar, roof side
rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the coat hook.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 56
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-57
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision? (Inflation and non-
inflation conditions of the air
bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (front)
(4) Side impact sensor (rear)
OKH035063N/OKH033064N/OKH033065N/OKH033074N/OKH033066N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 57
3-58
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due to
the deformation of the front bumper,
body, front door or C Pillar where the
collision sensors are installed. Have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Installing aftermarket bumper guards
or replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect your
vehicle’s collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OKH033084N
Air bag sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 58
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-59
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Side air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when
an impact is detected by side colli-
sion sensors depending on the
strength, speed or angles of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unim-
proved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
OKH033068N
OKH033091N
OKH033084N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 59
3-60
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, front air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the
severity, vehicle speed and angles
of impact.
• In a slant or angled collision, the
force of impact may direct the
occupants in a direction where the
air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit, and
thus the sensors may not deploy
any air bags.
OKH033085N
OKH033122NOKH033068N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 60
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-61
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
replaced by such “underride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because air bag
deployment could not provide pro-
tection to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact colli-
sion.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
OKH033086N OKH033120N OKH033069N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 61
3-62
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel must
be performed by an authorized K900
Kia dealer. Improper handling of the
SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one
which has been moistened with plain
water. Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag covers
and proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized K900 Kia dealer knows
these precautions and can give you
the necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Tampering with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other compo-
nents of the SRS system. Doing
so could result in the accidental
inflation of the air bags or by ren-
dering the SRS inoperative.
WARNING
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:36 AM Page 62
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-63
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required
by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to alert the driver and pas-
sengers of potential risks of the air bag
system.
OKH033071N
OKH033073N
OKH033072N
KH USA 3:2018 4/18/2017 9:37 AM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
4
Features of your vehicle
Smart key............................................................4-4
• Record your key number.........................................4-4
• Smart key functions.................................................4-4
• Smart key precautions ............................................4-6
• Remote keyless entry system operations ...............4-7
• Transmitter precautions...........................................4-8
• Battery replacement................................................4-9
• Mechanical key operations....................................4-10
• Restrictions in handling keys.................................4-10
• Immobilizer system................................................4-11
Theft-alarm system...........................................4-13
• Armed stage..........................................................4-13
• Theft-alarm stage..................................................4-14
• Disarmed stage.....................................................4-14
Door locks.........................................................4-16
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle......4-16
• Power door latch ...................................................4-17
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle........4-17
• Impact sensing door unlock system......................4-19
• Auto door lock/unlock feature................................4-19
• Child-protector rear door lock................................4-20
Trunk.................................................................4-21
• Non-powered trunk................................................4-21
• Power trunk ...........................................................4-22
• Trunk lid control button .........................................4-25
• Emergency trunk safety release............................4-26
• Smart trunk ...........................................................4-27
Windows ...........................................................4-31
• Power windows......................................................4-32
• Power window lock button.....................................4-34
Hood .................................................................4-35
• Opening the hood..................................................4-35
• Hood open warning...............................................4-36
• Closing the hood...................................................4-36
Fuel filler lid.......................................................4-37
• Opening the fuel filler lid .......................................4-37
• Closing the fuel filler lid.........................................4-37
• Emergency fuel filler lid release............................4-39
Panoramic sunroof............................................4-40
• Sunroof open warning...........................................4-40
• Sliding the sunroof ................................................4-41
• Closing the sunroof...............................................4-42
• Tilting the sunroof..................................................4-43
• Sunshade..............................................................4-44
• Resetting the sunroof............................................4-44
Steering wheel..................................................4-45
• Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)........4-45
• Tilt steering/telescope steering .............................4-45
• Heated steering wheel ..........................................4-46
• Horn ......................................................................4-47
Mirrors...............................................................4-48
• Inside rearview mirror............................................4-48
• Outside rearview mirror.........................................4-63
Instrument cluster.............................................4-67
4
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 1
• Instrument cluster control......................................4-68
• LCD display control...............................................4-68
• Gauges..................................................................4-69
• Transaxle shift indicator.........................................4-72
LCD display.......................................................4-73
• LCD modes ...........................................................4-73
• Trip computer mode...............................................4-74
• Turn by turn (TBT) mode.......................................4-75
• ASCC/LDWS mode...............................................4-75
• A/V mode ..............................................................4-75
• Information mode..................................................4-76
• User settings mode...............................................4-78
• Warning messages................................................4-85
Trip computer....................................................4-96
• Overview ...............................................................4-96
• Fuel economy........................................................4-96
• Trip A/B..................................................................4-98
Warning and indicator lights ...........................4-100
• Warning lights......................................................4-100
• Indicator lights.....................................................4-109
Head up display (HUD)...................................4-115
• Description ..........................................................4-115
• Head Up Display ON/OFF...................................4-116
• Head Up Display Information..............................4-116
• Head Up Display Setting.....................................4-117
Parking Assist System....................................4-118
• Operation of the Parking Assist System .............4-118
• Non-operational conditions of Parking Assist
System..............................................................4-120
• Self-diagnosis......................................................4-121
Rear Camera Display .....................................4-122
Parking Guide System....................................4-124
• Parking Guide System (PGS) display.................4-124
• Changing rear view angle ...................................4-125
Front Blind Spot Monitoring System...............4-126
Surround View Monitoring System (SVM)......4-127
Welcome system.............................................4-128
• Puddle lamp........................................................4-128
• Headlight.............................................................4-128
• Interior light .........................................................4-128
Lighting ...........................................................4-129
• Battery saver function .........................................4-129
• Headlight escort function ....................................4-129
• Daytime running light ..........................................4-130
• Lighting control....................................................4-130
• High beam operation...........................................4-133
• Turn signals and lane change signals.................4-134
• Front fog light ......................................................4-135
• Headlight leveling device.....................................4-135
Wipers and washers.......................................4-136
• Windshield wiper/washer.....................................4-136
Interior light.....................................................4-139
• Automatic turn off function..................................4-139
• Front lamp switch................................................4-139
4
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 2
Features of your vehicle
4
• Rear lamp switch.................................................4-140
• Trunk room lamp..................................................4-141
• Door courtesy lamp.............................................4-141
• Glove box lamp ...................................................4-142
• Vanity mirror lamp ...............................................4-142
Defroster.........................................................4-143
• Rear window defroster........................................4-143
Automatic climate control system...................4-144
• Automatic heating and air conditioning...............4-145
• Manual heating and air conditioning...................4-146
• System operation ................................................4-154
• Climate control air filter .......................................4-156
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant....................................4-157
• Air conditioning refrigerant label .........................4-157
Windshield defrosting and defogging..............4-158
• To defog inside windshield ..................................4-158
• To defrost outside windshield..............................4-159
• Defogging logic....................................................4-159
• Auto Defogging System.......................................4-160
• Auto defogging system ON/OFF.........................4-162
Climate Control Additional Features...............4-163
• Cluster ionizer .....................................................4-163
• Smart ventilation .................................................4-163
Storage compartments ...................................4-164
• Center console storage.......................................4-164
• Rear seat storage................................................4-165
• Glove box ............................................................4-165
• Sunglass holder ..................................................4-166
• Seatback pocket..................................................4-166
• Map pocket..........................................................4-167
Interior features...............................................4-168
• Cup holder...........................................................4-168
• Sunvisor ..............................................................4-169
• Power outlet.........................................................4-169
• Seat warmer........................................................4-171
• Air ventilation seat...............................................4-172
• Clock ...................................................................4-174
• Clothes hanger....................................................4-175
• Floor mat anchor(s).............................................4-175
• Rear vanity mirror................................................4-176
• Bag hanger..........................................................4-177
• Luggage net (holder)...........................................4-177
• Rear curtain.........................................................4-178
• Side curtain.........................................................4-179
Multimedia system..........................................4-180
• Aux, USB and iPod
®
port....................................4-180
• USB charger........................................................4-180
• Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN)............4-181
• Driver Information System (DIS).........................4-181
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free.......4-182
• Antenna...............................................................4-182
• Steering wheel audio control ..............................4-183
4
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 3
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized K900 Kia deal-
er to duplicate the keys easily.
Remove the key code tag and store it
in a safe place. Also, record the key
code number and keep it in a safe
and handy place, but not in the vehi-
cle.
Smart key functions
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Trunk open
4. Panic alarm
SMART KEY
Features of your vehicle
4-4
OKH043004N
■ Conventional smart key
Smart key
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a smart
key is dangerous. Children
copy adults and they could
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 4
With smart key, you can lock or
unlock doors (and trunk) and start
the engine without inserting the key.
Refer to the following, for more
details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the front out-
side door handles with all doors
closed and any door unlocked, locks
all the doors. The hazard warning
lights will blink and the chime will
sound once to indicate that all doors
are locked. The button will only oper-
ate when the smart key is within
28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make
sure that a door has locked or not,
you should check the door lock but-
ton inside the vehicle or pull the out-
side door handle.
In some instances, when the outside
door button is selected, the doors will
not lock and an audible chime will
sound for 3 seconds if any of the fol-
lowing occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
the ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is
opened.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-5
OKH043003N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 5
Features of your vehicle
4-6
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the driver's (or
front passenger’s) outside door han-
dle with all doors closed and locked,
unlocks the driver's door.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound twice to
indicate that the driver's door is
unlocked. Also, the outside rearview
mirrors will automatically unfold if the
outside rearview mirror folding switch
is in the AUTO position.
If you press the button of the driver's
outside door handle again within 4
seconds, The other doors will be
unlocked. But if you press the button
of the driver's outside door handle
again after 4 seconds, all doors will
be locked.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1m)
from the outside door handle.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to “Starting the engine
with a smart key” in chapter 5.
Smart key precautions
• If you lose your smart key, you will
not be able to start the engine. Tow
the vehicle, if necessary, and con-
tact an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should imme-
diately take the vehicle and key to
your authorized K900 Kia dealer to
protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile
two-way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart key,
contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
call, receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
Transmitter
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 6
Features of your vehicle
4
4-7
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button
is pressed. If all doors (and trunk) are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once to indicate that all doors
(and trunk) are locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed
once more within 4 seconds, the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound once to confirm
that the door is locked.
However, if any door remains open,
the hazard warning lights (and/or the
chime) will not operate. But if all
doors are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
will blink once.
Unlock (2)
The driver's door is unlocked if the
unlock button is pressed once. The
hazard warning lights will blink (for
smart key, the chime also sounds)
twice to indicate that the driver's door
is unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once more within 4
seconds. The hazard warning lights
will blink (for smart key, the chime
also sounds) twice again to indicate
that all doors are unlocked. After
pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open
any door within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
OKH043004N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 7
Features of your vehicle
4-8
Trunk open (3)
The trunk will open if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automati-
cally.
Panic alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard
warning lights blink for about 30 sec-
onds if this button is pressed for
more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the
horn and lights, press any button on
the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions
The transmitter (or smart key) will not
work if any of following occurs:
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or
smart key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is
close to a radio transmitter such as
a radio station or an airport which
can interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key)
does not work properly, open and
close the door with the smart key. If
you have a problem with the trans-
mitter (or smart key), contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximi-
ty to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the transmitter could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone. This
is especially important when the
phone is active such as making call,
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the transmitter and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
Transmitter damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 8
Features of your vehicle
4
4-9
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules")
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
Battery replacement
Conventional smart key
A battery should last for several
years, but if the smart key is not work-
ing properly, try replacing the battery
with a new one. If you are unsure how
to use or replace the battery, contact
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
1.Pry open the smart key center cover.
2.Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3.Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OKH043006N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 9
Features of your vehicle
4-10
Mechanical key operations
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• Lock and unlock the doors when
the vehicle or smart key battery is
discharged.
Conventional smart key
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key(2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Restrictions in Handling Keys
When leaving keys with parking lot
and valet attendants, the following
procedures will ensure your vehicle’s
trunk and glove box compartment
can only be opened with the
mechanical key.
OKH043008N OKH043010N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 10
Features of your vehicle
4
4-11
To lock:
1.Remove the mechanical key from
the Smart Key.
2.Unlock the glove box by using the
mechanical key, then open it.
3.Set the Trunk Lid Control button to
the OFF position (not depressed).
4.Close and lock the glove box using
the mechanical key.
5.Leave the Smart Key with the
attendant and keep the mechanical
key with you.
The Smart Key can only be used to
start the engine and operate door
locks.
To release:
1.Open the glove box with the
mechanical key.
2.Set the Trunk Lid Control button to
the ON position (depressed).
In this position the trunk lid will open
with the Trunk Lid button or the
Smart Key.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Whenever the ENGINE START/STOP
button is changed to the ON position,
the immobilizer system checks and
verifies if the key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system
Change the ENGINE START/STOP
button to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the ENGINE START/STOP
button to the OFF position. The immo-
bilizer system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
Your immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave this
number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
Keep each key separate in order to
avoid a starting malfunction.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 11
Features of your vehicle
4-12
Do not put metal accessories near
the smart key.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules")
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Immobilizer damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION
Immobilizer alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 12
Features of your vehicle
4
4-13
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is operat-
ed in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the
system provides an audible alarm with
blinking of the hazard warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Make sure that all doors (and
trunk) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3.• Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key).
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, trunk or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warn-
ing lights won’t operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, trunk and engine hood are
closed, the hazard warning lights
blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handles with the smart key in
your possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t oper-
ate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the door and try again to
lock the doors.
If trunk or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights
won’t operate and theft-alarm will
not arm. Close the trunk or
engine hood. The hazard warn-
ing lights blink once and theft-
alarm arms.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 13
Features of your vehicle
4-14
The theft-alarm system by the key
can be activated by an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s)
leaves the vehicle. If any door (or
trunk) or engine hood is opened
within 30 seconds after the sys-
tem enters the armed stage, the
system will be disarmed to pre-
vent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened with-
out using the smart key (or
mechanical key).
• The trunk is opened without using
the smart key (or mechanical key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds. To
turn off the system, unlock the doors
with the smart key.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if
any door (or trunk) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 14
Features of your vehicle
4
4-15
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, open the doors by
using the mechanical key and start
the engine by directly pressing the
engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 15
Features of your vehicle
4-16
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
• After removing the cover (1) ~ (2),
turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock (3).
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with a key, only the driver’s door
will lock/unlock.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key).
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
by pressing the button of the out-
side door handle with the smart
key in your possession.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
OKH043005N
Lock
Unlock
If people must spend a longer
time in the vehicle while it is
very hot or cold outside, there
is rick of injuries or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are peo-
ple in it.
WARNING
Do not frequently repeat open-
ing and closing of doors, or
apply excessive force to a door
while the door closer is operat-
ing.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 16
Features of your vehicle
4
4-17
Power Door Latch (if equipped)
If a door isn’t closed completely but
is closed to the first detent position,
the door will close automatically.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not show.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock
button is in the lock position, the
button will unlock and the door will
open.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
front door is opened.
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
OKH043012N
Lock
Unlock
OKH043011N
To reduce the risk of injury:
• Before closing the door, check
there are no obstructions in
the path of the door.
• Keep your fingers away from
the edge of the door or they
may become trapped when the
power door latch operates.
WARNING
Do not pull the inner door han-
dle of driver’s(or passenger’s)
door while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:55 PM Page 17
Features of your vehicle
4-18
Rear door lock button
• To lock a rear door, press the door
lock button (1). The indicator on the
button will illuminate.
• To unlock a rear door, press the
door unlock button (2). The indica-
tor on the button will illuminate.
• The rear door lock operates only
on the rear doors with a rear door
lock button.
With central door lock switch
Locking
• When pressing the door lock but-
ton (1), all vehicle doors will lock
and the indicator on the button will
illuminate. If any door is unlocked,
the indicator will turn off.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is opened, doors will
not lock.
Unlocking
When pressing the door unlock but-
ton (2), all vehicle doors will unlock
and the indicator on the button will
illuminate.
If any door is locked, the indicator will
turn off.
OKH043013N
OKH043014N
Driver’s door
Passenger’s door
OKH043014N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 18
Features of your vehicle
4
4-19
Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
WARNING
Unattended children/ani-
mals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
WARNING
Rear door locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, they can fall
out.
WARNING
Unlocked vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 19
Impact sensing door unlock
system
All doors will automatically unlock
when an impact causes the air bags
to deploy.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
You can activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features in the
vehicle. Refer to "LCD display" in this
chapter.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock (1) is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock position
( ), that rear door will not open if
the inner door handle is pulled (2).
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock ( )
the child safety lock.
Features of your vehicle
4-20
OKH043015N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 20
Features of your vehicle
4
4-21
Non-Powered Trunk
To open:
1.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2.Then do one of the following :
- Press the smart key trunk unlock
button for more than one second.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself with the smart key in your
possession.
- Use the mechanical key.
- Use the trunk release button (or
lever).
3.Lift the trunk lid up.
To close:
Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
tions.
TRUNK
OKH045016N
OKH043017N
OKH043518N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Exhaust fumes
The trunk lid should always be
kept completely closed while the
vehicle is in motion. If it is left
open or ajar, exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness
or death may result.
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are
near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the trunk.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 21
Features of your vehicle
4-22
Power Trunk
To open:
1.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2. Then do one of the following:
- Press the smart key trunk unlock
button for more than one second.
- Press the open button on the
trunk. You need the smart Key in
your possession, when all doors
are locked.
- Press the power trunk main con-
trol button (for type A).
- Pull the power trunk, main con-
trol lever (for type B).
OKH045019N/OKH045020N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043257N/OKH043259N/OKH045018N
(1) Power Trunk Main Control button
(or lever)
(2) Power Trunk Open button
(3) Power Trunk Close button
(4) Power Trunk Lock button
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 22
Features of your vehicle
4
4-23
To close:
Do one of the following:
- Press the power trunk main control
button until the power trunk is
closed securely (for type A).
- Push the power trunk main control
lever until the power trunk is closed
securely (for type B).
- Press the close button on the trunk.
- Press the lock button on the trunk
while carrying the smart key and all
the vehicle’s doors and trunk are
closed. All doors and trunk will lock
and arm the theft alarm system.
If you push a button or lever while the
trunk is opening or closing, it could
stop moving. Press any button to
operate the power trunk again.
✽ NOTICE
The power trunk lock button will
not work if you press the button
when:
- Any door is open.
- The engine start/stop button is not
in the OFF position.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
Do not leave the power trunk open
for a long period of time. This may
drain the battery.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
tions.
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
power trunk. Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
WARNING
• Do not close or open the
power trunk manually. This
may cause damage to the
power trunk. If it is necessary
to close or open the power
trunk manually when the bat-
tery is drained or disconnect-
ed, do not apply excessive
force.
• To prevent damage to the
trunk lift cylinders and the
attached hardware, always
close the trunk before driving.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 23
Features of your vehicle
4-24
Power Trunk Non-Opening or
Closing Conditions:
• The power trunk will not open or
close automatically, when the vehi-
cle is moving more than 1.8 mph (3
km/h).
• The power trunk can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However, the power trunk operation
consumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the bat-
tery from draining, do not operate it
excessively (e.g., more than
approximately 10 times repeatedly).
• Do not modify or repair any part of
the power trunk by yourself. This
must be done by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
• Before jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
open the power trunk. Do not oper-
ate the power trunk when the vehi-
cle is raised or this could cause the
power trunk to operate improperly.
• If there are obstacles such as snow
on the power trunk, it may not open
automatically. After removing the
obstacle, try to open it again.
Automatic stop and Reverse
If, during power opening or closing,
the trunk is blocked by an object or
part of someone’s body, the power
trunk will detect the resistance and it
will stop movement or move to the
full open position to allow the object
to be cleared.
However, if an object is thin or soft,
or the trunk is near the latched posi-
tion, the automatic stop and reversal
may not detect the resistance and
the closing operation will continue. If
the power trunk is forced by a strong
impact, the automatic stop and rever-
sal may operate.
If the automatic stop and reverse fea-
ture operates more than twice during
one opening or closing operation, the
power trunk may stop at that posi-
tion. If this occurs, close the trunk
manually and operate the trunk auto-
matically again.
OKH045021N
To prevent serious injury and
damage take the following pre-
cautions when operating the
power trunk:
- Keep all faces, hands, arms,
body parts and other objects
away from the path of the
power trunk.
- Do not intentionally place any
body parts or objects in the
path of the power trunk to
make sure the automatic stop
and reversal operates.
- Do not allow children to play
with the power trunk.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 24
Features of your vehicle
4
4-25
To Reset the Power Trunk
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse
has been replaced or disconnected,
reset the power trunk as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P(Park)
position.
2. Close the trunk manually.
If the power trunk doesn't work prop-
erly after performing the above pro-
cedure, have the system checked by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Trunk Lid Control Button
When the trunk lid control button is
ON (depressed), the power trunk can
be controlled with the power trunk
main control button, power trunk
open, close button, and the smart key.
When this trunk lid control button is
OFF (not depressed), the power
trunk can be controlled using the
mechanical key of the smart key only.
Even though the trunk lid control but-
ton is OFF (not depressed), the trunk
will still be propelled upward by
mechanical force if the trunk is man-
ually opened more than 10 degrees
beyond the fully closed position.
In addition, if the trunk is manually
closed to the secondary latch posi-
tion, the trunk will be electrically
moved to the fully latched position.
✽ NOTICE
Close the trunk, and keep the trunk
lid control button in the OFF (not
depressed) position before washing
the vehicle in an automatic car
wash.
OKH043022N
Always keep the Trunk Lid
Control Button in the OFF (not
depressed) position when not
in use. Serious injury or death
can result from unintentional
operation by a child.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 25
Features of your vehicle
4-26
✽ NOTICE
If the trunk does not unlock using the
smart key or the trunk lid release
button, ensure the trunk lock system
is not activated. To release the trunk
lock feature, open the glove box with
the mechanical key and set the trunk
lid control button to the ON position
(pressed). In this position the trunk
will open with the trunk lid button or
smart key.
Emergency Trunk Safety
Release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever located inside the trunk. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the trunk, the trunk can be opened by
moving the lever in the direction of the
arrow and pushing the trunk open.
OKH045024N
NEVER allow anyone to occupy
the trunk of the vehicle at any
time. If the trunk is partially or
totally latched and the person is
unable to get out, serious injury
or death could occur due to lack
of ventilation, exhaust fumes and
rapid heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather condi-
tions. The trunk is also a highly
dangerous location in the event
of a crash because it is not a pro-
tected occupant space but is a
part of the vehicle’s crush zone.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 26
Features of your vehicle
4
4-27
• You and your passengers must be
aware of the location of the
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever in this vehicle and how to
open the trunk in case you are
accidentally locked in the trunk.
• Your vehicle should be kept locked
and the Smart Key should be kept
out of the reach of children.
Parents should teach their children
about the dangers of playing in
trunks.
• Use the release lever for emergen-
cies only.
Smart trunk (if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the trunk can be opened with
no-touch activation using the Smart
Trunk system.
Make sure that there are no peo-
ple or objects in the path of the
power trunk (or smart trunk)
prior to use. Serious injury,
damage to the vehicle or dam-
age to surrounding objects may
result if contact with the power
trunk (or smart trunk) occurs.
WARNING
OKH045548N
OKH045505N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 27
Features of your vehicle
4-28
How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with
notouch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
• The Smart Trunk does not operate
when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is contin-
uously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and within 60
inches (1.5 m) from the front
door handles. (for vehicles
equipped with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (20~40 inches (50 ~100 cm)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the trunk will
open.
✽ NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the trunk to open.
If you have unintentionally entered
the detecting area and the hazard
warning lights and chime starts to
operate, leave the detecting area
with the smart key. The trunk will
stay closed.
OKH045574N OKH045506N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 28
Features of your vehicle
4
4-29
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the trunk will slowly open.
• Make sure you close the trunk
before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the trunk before
opening or closing the trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk do
not come out when opening the
trunk on a slope. It may cause seri-
ous injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the Smart
Trunk when washing your vehicle.
Otherwise, the trunk may open
inadvertently.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children may
inadvertently open the Smart Trunk
while playing around the rear area
of the vehicle.
How to deactivate the Smart
Trunk function using the smart
key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Trunk open
4. Panic
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
OKH045507N
OKH043004N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 29
Features of your vehicle
4-30
✽ NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton(2), the Smart Trunk function
will be deactivated temporarily.
But, if you do not open any door
for 30 seconds, the smart trunk
function will be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
(3) for more than 1 second, the
trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or trunk open button (3) when
the Smart Trunk function is not in
the Detect and Alert stage, the
smart trunk function will not be
deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Trunk function by pressing
the smart key button and opened a
door, the smart trunk function can
be activated again by closing and
locking all doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Trunk operates with a
welcome alert if the smart key is
detected within 20~40 inches
(50~100 cm) from the trunk.
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
✽ NOTICE
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following
occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio-
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked
on a slope or unpaved road, etc.
OKH045508N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 30
Features of your vehicle
4
4-31
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down
(7) Power window lock button
WINDOWS
OKH043025N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 31
Features of your vehicle
4-32
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
Power windows
The Engine Start/Stop button must
be in the ON position for power win-
dows to operate. Each door has a
power window switch that controls
the door’s window. The driver has a
power window lock switch which can
block the operation of rear passen-
ger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
engine is turned off. However, if the
front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
If the window cannot be close
because it is blocked by objects,
remove the objects and close the
window.
✽ NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
✽ NOTICE
Do not install any accessories in the
vehicle that extend into the open
window area. Such objects will
impact the proper function of the
Automatic reversal "jam protec-
tion" feature described on page 4-33
of this manual.
Window opening and closing
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
OKH043026N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 32
Features of your vehicle
4
4-33
1.Press the Engine Start/Stop Button
twice to the ON position.
2.Close the window and continue
pulling up on the driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 second
after the window is completely
closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
And if the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 seconds
after the window is lowered by the auto-
matic window reversal feature, the auto-
matic window reversal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
The automatic reverse feature does-
n’t activate while resetting power
window system. Make sure body
parts or other objects are safely out
of the way before closing the win-
dows to avoid injuries or vehicle
damage.
OKH043277N
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 33
Features of your vehicle
4-34
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers’ doors by pressing the power
window lock switch. The indicator will
be illuminated.
When the power window lock switch
indicator is illuminated :
• The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s
power window.
• The rear passenger’s control can-
not operate the rear passenger’s
power window.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
OKH043027N
Power windows
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
dow lock button in the LOCK
position (illuminated).
• Do not extend a face or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
WARNING
Opening / closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 34
Features of your vehicle
4
4-35
HOOD
Opening the hood
1.Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the 1st
(First) gear or R (Reverse) for manu-
al transaxle, and setting the parking
brake.
2.Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the second-
ary latch (1) left of the hood center
and lift the hood (2).
3.Raise the hood. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
OKH043028N
OKH043029N
Unsecured Engine Hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, causing a total loss of visi-
bility, which might result in an
accident.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 35
Features of your vehicle
4-36
Hood open warning
The warning message will appear on
the LCD display when hood is open.
The warning chime will operate when
the vehicle is being driven above
2mph (3km/h) with the hood open.
Closing the hood
1.Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2.Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3.Lower the hood until it is about
30cm above the closed position
and let it drop. Make sure that it
locks into place.
4.Check that the hood has engaged
properly. If the hood can be raised
slightly, it is not properly engaged.
Open it again and close it with a lit-
tle more force.
Hood obstruction
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are
removed from the hood open-
ing. Closing the hood with an
obstruction present in the hood
opening may result in property
damage or severe personal
injury.
WARNING
Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in
the engine compartment. Doing
so may cause a heat-induced
fire.
WARNING
OKH047940N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 36
Features of your vehicle
4
4-37
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1.Stop the engine.
2.To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener up.
3.Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to
fully open.
4.To remove the cap turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5.Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1.To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it "clicks" once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2.Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
WARNING
OKH043030N
OKH043032N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:56 PM Page 37
Features of your vehicle
4-38
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Fire/explosion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING
Static electricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate poten-
tially dangerous static elec-
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
WARNING
Cell phone fires
Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
WARNING
Portable fuel container
When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete. Use
only approved portable plastic
fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 38
Features of your vehicle
4
4-39
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually by
pulling the handle outward slightly.
OKH043031N
Refueling& Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
WARNING
Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your vehi-
cle while at a gas station espe-
cially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly flam-
mable and can, when ignited,
result in fire.
WARNING
Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 39
Features of your vehicle
4-40
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver turns off the engine when
the sunroof is not fully closed, the
warning chime will sound for a few
seconds and a warning message will
appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
OKH043033N
OKH043402N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Sunroof control lever
Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or tilt-
ed. Damage to the motor or sys-
tem components could occur.
CAUTION
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 40
Features of your vehicle
4
4-41
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward to the second detent posi-
tion, the sunshade will slide all the
way open, then the sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
OKH043501N
Sunroof operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
WARNING
To avoid accident injury, do not
let children operate the sunroof
without adult supervision.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 41
Features of your vehicle
4-42
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the first detent position or
pull the lever downward.
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the second detent position.
The sunroof glass will close, then the
sunshade close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
✽ NOTICE
Only the front glass of the panorama
sunroof opens and closes.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in
diameter caught between the sun-
roof glass and the front glass chan-
nel may not be detected by the auto-
matic reverse glass and the glass will
not stop and reverse direction.
OKH043503N
Sunroof
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside through
the sunroof opening while driv-
ing or operating the sunroof.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 42
Features of your vehicle
4
4-43
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all
the way open, then the sunroof glass
will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Sunroof Motor Damage
• To prevent damage to the sun-
roof motor, periodically
remove any dirt that may
accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
CAUTION
OKH043502N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 43
Features of your vehicle
4-44
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, pull the
sunroof control lever backward to
the first detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed, push the
sunroof control lever forward.
To stop the sliding at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
✽ NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on
the blind because of its material
characteristic.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, or related
fuse is blown, you must reset your
sunroof system as follows:
1. The Engine Start/Stop Button must
be in the ON position.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Push and hold the control lever for-
ward (for more than 10 seconds)
until the sunroof tilts and slightly
moves. Then, release the lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close until
the sunroof operates as follows:
Sunroof glass and sunshade open →
Sunroof glass and sunshade close
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
❈For more detailed information, con-
tact an authorized K900 Kia deal-
er.
✽ NOTICE
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is blown,
the sunroof may operate improperly.
OKH043504N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 44
Features of your vehicle
4
4-45
STEERING WHEEL
Electronic Hydraulic Power
Steering (EHPS)
This system uses an electromotor to
assist you with steering the vehicle.
If the engine is turned off or if the
EHPS becomes inoperative, you
may still steer the vehicle, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the EHPS
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the EHPS motor pump malfunc-
tions, the steering effort will greatly
increase.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below 14°F/-10°C), the power steer-
ing may require increased effort
when the engine is first started. This
is caused by increased fluid viscosity
due to the cold weather and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing accelera-
tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm
then release or let the engine idle for
two or three minutes to warm up the
fluid.
Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering
Adjust the steering wheel angle (2)
and position (3) with the knob (1) on
the steering column. Move the steer-
ing wheel, so it points toward your
chest, not toward your face. Make
sure you can see the instrument
panel warning lights and gauges.
After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be cer-
tain it is locked in position. Always
adjust the position of the steering
wheel before driving.
Do not hold the steering wheel
to the extreme right or left for
more than five (5) seconds with
the engine running. This may
cause damage to the EHPS
motor pump.
CAUTION
OKH043042N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 45
Features of your vehicle
4-46
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the Engine Start/Stop Button
is in the ON position, press the heat-
ed steering wheel button to warm the
steering wheel. The indicator on the
button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
OKH043043N
Steering wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
WARNING
Steering Wheel Damage
Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
CAUTION
Heated Steering Wheel
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 46
Features of your vehicle
4
4-47
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
OKH043044N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 47
Features of your vehicle
4-48
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink
®
system and
compass (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav
®
Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
OKH043505N
Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 48
Features of your vehicle
4
4-49
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety
™
(NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation. For more
information regarding NVS
®
mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
❈Night Vision Safety™ is a registered
trademark of Gentex Corporation.
✽ NOTICE
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving condi-
tions based upon light levels moni-
tored in front of the vehicle and from
the rear of the vehicle. These light
sensors are visible through openings
in the front and rear of the mirror
case. Any object that obstructs either
light sensor will degrade the automat-
ic dimming control feature.
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by the Dimming ON/OFF Button:
1.Pressing the button turns the
auto-dimming function OFF which
is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2.Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
✽ NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-NAV™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
❈ Z-Nav™ is a registered trademark
of Gentex Corporation.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 49
Features of your vehicle
4-50
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1.Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2.Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 50
Features of your vehicle
4
4-51
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2.Press and hold the button for
more than 3, but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number will
appear on the display.
3.Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display will
set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds, the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or a
CB antenna. Body repair work on the
vehicle can also cause changes to the
vehicle's magnetic field. In these situa-
tions, the compass will need to be re-
calibrated to quickly correct for these
changes. To re-calibrate the compass:
1.Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared, a "C"
will appear in the display.
2.To calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-
frequency (RF) transmitters with a
single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to
operate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. Both standard and
rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the
outlined procedures. Additional
HomeLink
®
information can be found
at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
❈HomeLink
®
is a registered trade-
mark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 51
Features of your vehicle
4-52
\
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
Programming HomeLink
®
✽ NOTICE
• When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quick-
er training and accurate transaxle
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
Engine Start/Stop button to be
turned to the second (or "acces-
sories") position for programming
and/or operation of HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi-
cator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
Do not hold the buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink
®
successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 52
Features of your vehicle
4
4-53
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate when
the HomeLink
®
button is pressed
and released.
6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner's
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink
®
button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds.
To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit. Exact location
and color of the button may vary by
garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the train-
ing button, reference the device
owner's manual or please visit our
Web site at www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light").
✽ NOTICE
There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step 3.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 53
Features of your vehicle
4-54
3. Return to the vehicle, firmly press
and hold for two seconds the desired
HomeLink
®
button then release.
Repeat the "press/hold/release"
sequence a second time to com-
plete the programming. (Some
devices may require you to repeat
this sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate.
5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard
Programming for standard devices.
Gate operator &
Canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 54
Features of your vehicle
4
4-55
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a new device to a previ-
ously trained HomeLink
®
button, fol-
low these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter
1 to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink
®
surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button. The
HomeLink
®
indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your new device should activate.
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the Programming
sections above.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules")
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 55
Features of your vehicle
4-56
The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to
operate the device.
NVS
®
and Z-NAV™ are registered
trademarks. Nav
®
are of Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trade-
mark owned by Johnson Controls
Technology Company, Holland,
Michigan.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
HomeLink® system, compass and
UVO (for U.S.A, if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System. During
nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
(1) (i)Information
(2) UVO Button
(Google Local Search)
(3) RSA(Roadside Assistance)
(4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor
OKH045933N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 56
Features of your vehicle
4
4-57
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror (if equipped)
The NVS
®
Mirror automaticallyre-
duces glare by monitoring light levels
in the front and the rear of the vehi-
cle. Any object that obstructs either
light sensor will degrade the auto-
matic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applica-
tions, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The
autodimming function can be con-
trolled by pressing the Dimming
ON/OFF button:
1.Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-
ming function OFF which is indicat-
ed by the green Status Indicator
LED turning off.
2.Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds again turns the auto-
dimming function ON which is indi-
cated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 57
Features of your vehicle
4-58
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1.Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2.Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting
based on where you live.
B520C05NF
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 58
Features of your vehicle
4
4-59
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2.Press and hold the button for 6
seconds, the current Zone Number
will appear on the display.
3.Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display will
set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com-
pass:
1.Press and hold the button for
more than 9 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2.Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-
cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System can replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate
devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling
code-equipped transmitters can be
programmed by following the out-
lined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:57 PM Page 59
Features of your vehicle
4-60
Programming HomeLink
®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be placed in the
ACC (or "Accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons
( , ), HomeLink
®
Channel 1
and Channel 3, until the indicator
light begins to flash (after 10 sec-
onds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to program while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
blinking light. Now you may
release both the HomeLink
®
and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
OKH045934N
Flashing
OKH045935N
Flashing
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 60
Features of your vehicle
4
4-61
INFORMATION
Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming step 3
with procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
chapter. If the HomeLink
®
indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com.
4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds
and release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button up to two sepa-
rate times to activate the door. If
the door does not activate, press
and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the
indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-
plete the programming of a
rolling code equipped device
(most commonly a garage door
opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
6. Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button. (The
name and color of the button vary
by manufacturer). There are 30
seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on
the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming process.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
i
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 61
Features of your vehicle
4-62
Gate operator & Canadian pro-
gramming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 3 in the Programming por-
tion of this document) while you
press and re-press ("cycle") your
handheld transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has
been learned. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds upon successful
training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a device to HomeLink
®
using a HomeLink
®
button previous-
ly trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT
release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the HomeLink
®
button, proceed
with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 62
Features of your vehicle
4
4-63
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash after 10
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed
at any time following the appropriate
steps in the Programming chapters
above.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trade-
mark owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
INFORMATION
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
3.The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the
device.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed to prevent damage during an auto-
matic car wash or when passing
through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
i
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
4-64
Adjusting outside rearview mirror
Adjusting the rearview mirrors:
Press either the L (driver’s side) or R
(passenger’s side) button (1) to
select the rearview mirror you would
like to adjust.
Use the mirror adjustment control (2)
to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the L or R
button (1) again to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
OKH043048N
Rearview mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving
when they reach the maxi-
mum adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
CAUTION
Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 64
Features of your vehicle
4
4-65
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
While the vehicle is moving rear-
ward, the outside rearview mirror(s)
will move downward to aid reverse
parking. According to the position of
the outside rearview mirror switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
L/R :When the remote control out-
side rearview mirror switch is
selected to the L (left) or R
(right) position, both outside
rearview mirrors will move
downward.
Neutral : When the remote control
outside rearview mirror
switch is placed in the mid-
dle, the outside rearview
mirrors will not operate
while the vehicle is moving
rearward.
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions:
1.The Engine Start/Stop button is in
the OFF position.
2.Shift lever is moved to any position
except R (Reverse).
3.Remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is placed in the mid-
dle.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
OKH043040N
OKH043049N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 65
Features of your vehicle
4-66
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows:
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
• The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
The electric chromic mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lights of the car behind you in night-
time or low light driving conditions. The
sensor mounted in the mirror senses
the light level around the vehicle, and
automatically controls the headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare
is automatically controlled by the sen-
sor mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into R (Reverse), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle. If the ECM of
inside rear view mirror operates, it
will be working.
Electric type outside
rearview mirror
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
engine start/stop button is in the
OFF position. However, to prevent
unnecessary battery discharge,
do not adjust the mirrors longer
than necessary while the engine
is not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 66
Features of your vehicle
4
4-67
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights
OKH045050N/OKH045051N
■ Type A
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 67
Features of your vehicle
4-68
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination can be adjusted by
pressing the illumination control but-
tons (“+” or “-”) when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is ON or the tale
lights are turned on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) < , > : MODE button for changing
modes.
(2)
,
: MOVE button for chang-
ing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
❈For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OKH043052N
OKH045542N
OKH043087N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 68
Features of your vehicle
4
4-69
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
The unit of the speedometer (Type B)
can be changed from km/h to MPH or
from MPH to km/h on the LCD display.
❈From more details, refer to "LCD
Display."
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
OKH043055N
OKH043056N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043053N
OKH043054N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 69
Features of your vehicle
4-70
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
engine is running.
OKH043057N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
CAUTION
Hot Radiator
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 70
Features of your vehicle
4
4-71
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽ NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
Stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the “E
(Empty)” level.
✽ NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
OKH043058N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
4-72
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
pressing the OFF button and AUTO
button on the front climate control
panel for 3 seconds simultaneously.
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
• Park : P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive : D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
OKH047124N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043059N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043060N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:58 PM Page 72
Features of your vehicle
4
4-73
LCD Modes
LCD DISPLAY
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on. For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Turn By Turn This mode displays the state of the navigation.
ASCC/LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)
and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)" or
"Lane Departurn Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information
This mode informs of the tire pressure information, service interval (mileage or days)
and warning messages related to the advanced smart cruise control system,
pre-active seat belt, and so on.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
or
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 73
Features of your vehicle
4-74
Cannot edit settings while driving
This warning message illuminates if
you try to select the other User
Settings item except Head-up dis-
play item when driving.
For safety, change the User Settings
after parking the vehicle and moving
the shift lever to P (Park) position.
Quick guide (Help)
If you press and hold the OK button
in the User Settings Mode, explana-
tion about the selected item is dis-
played in the cluster.
Trip Computer Mode
This mode displays driving informa-
tion like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on.
❈For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
OKH047408N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045560N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045527N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 74
Features of your vehicle
4
4-75
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
ASCC/LDWS Mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) or Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS).
❈ For more details, refer to "Advanced
Smart Cruise Control (ASCC)" and
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V Mode
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
OKH043400N
OKH043411N
ASCC LDWS
OKH045561N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 75
Features of your vehicle
4-76
Information Mode
This mode shows the service interval
(mileage and days) and pressure of
each tire.
To change the information mode,
Press the
,
(MOVE) button.
❈ For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the Engine Start/Stop Button
to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, "Service required"
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the OK button for more than
1 second.
OKH045423N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043413N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 76
Features of your vehicle
4
4-77
Service interval OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service interval OFF" message is
displayed on the LCD display.
✽ NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Tire Pressure
This mode displays the pressure sta-
tus of each tire.
You can change the tire pressure unit
in "User settings" mode.
❈For more details, refer to "User
Settings mode" in this chapter.
Warning Message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
information mode for several sec-
onds.
- Malfunction of below systems
• Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
• Preactive Seat Belt (PSB)
• Electronic Control Suspension
(ECS)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System
• Advanced Smart Cruise Control
• Low washer fluid
• LED Headlamp (LED)
• Active Air Flap(AAF)
OKH043403N
OKH043405N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 77
Features of your vehicle
4-78
User Settings Mode
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lights, and so on.
Items Explanation
Display Height Adjust the height of the HUD image on the windshield glass.
Rotation Adjust the degree of the HUD rotation.
Brightness Adjust the intensity of the HUD brightness
Contents Select
Activate or deactivate each contents of the HUD
(TBT*, ASCC*, LDWS*, BSD*).
❈ TBT : Turn By Turn
ASCC : Advanced Smart Cruise Control
LDWS : Lane Departure Warning System
BSD : Blind Spot Detection
* : if equipped
Speedometer
Size
Choose the size of the HUD speedometer (Small, Medium, Large).
Speedometer
Color
Choose the color of the HUD speedometer (White, Orange, Green).
✽ NOTICE
If you select the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information as HUD con-
tents, the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information will not be displayed
on the LCD.
OKH045525N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Head-Up Display (HUD) (if equipped)
Do not adjust the User Setting
while driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 78
Features of your vehicle
4
4-79
Driving Assist
Items Explanation
AEB (Autonomous
Emergency Braking)
(if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the AEB system.
❈ For more details, refer to "Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
(if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.
❈ For more details, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 79
Features of your vehicle
4-80
Door
Items Explanation
Automatically Lock
• Disable : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed : All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds
9mph (15km/h)
• Enable on Shift : All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Automatically Unlock
• Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Star/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Driver Door Unlock : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked
• On Shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
• Off (Unchecked) : The two press unlock function will be deactivated.Therefore, all doors will
unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On: (checked) : The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked.When the door is unlocked
again within 4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Door Lock Sound Activate or deactivate door lock confirm sound.
Smart Trunk
(if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the Smart Trunk system.
❈ For more details, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 80
Features of your vehicle
4
4-81
Lights
Sound
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off: The one touch turn lamp function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashing : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay
Activate or deactivate the head lamp delay function.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Welcome Light
Activate or deactivate the welcome light function.
❈ For more details, refer to “Welcome system” in this chapter.
Items Explanation
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
Sound
(if equipped)
• Off : The BSD sound function will be deactivated.
• On : The BSD sound function will be activated.
Welcome Sound
• Off : The welcome sound function will be deactivated.
• On : The welcome sound function will be activated.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 81
Features of your vehicle
4-82
Display (for Type B Cluster)
Items Explanation
Theme Choose the instrument cluster theme. (Default or Retro)
Auto Theme change
• On (checked) : The instrument cluster theme is automatically changed.
• Off : The automatic change function of the instrument cluster theme will be deactivated
Traffic Alerts
• On(checked) : The LCD display will show traffic information.
• Off(unchecked) : The LCD display will not show traffic information.
Speedometer Size Choose the size of the number in the speedometer (Small, Medium, Large).
Speedometer Unit Choose the main unit of the speedometer (MPH or km/h).
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, liter)
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 82
Features of your vehicle
4
4-83
Seat/Steering
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• None : The seat easy access function will be deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward by 2 inches
(Normal) or 3 inches (Enhanced) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop Button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
❈ For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in chapter 3.
Steering Easy Access
• On (checked) : The steering wheel will automatically move forward or rearward for the driver to
enter or exit the vehicle comfortably.
• Off (unchecked) : The steering easy access function will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in chapter 3.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 83
Features of your vehicle
4-84
Other Features
Service Interval
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
• Off :
The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• On (Auto Reset) :
The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
❈ For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Wiper/Lights Display
• Off: The wiper/lights information will not be displayed on the LCD display.
• On: The LCD display will shortly show the selected wiper/lights information.
Tire Pressure Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)
Items Explanation
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 84
Features of your vehicle
4
4-85
Warning Messages
(if equipped)
Shift to P position
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
OKH043921N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045418N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045927N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 85
Features of your vehicle
4-86
Key not in vehicle
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
while the door is opened or closed
with the Engine Start/Stop button
in the ACC position or engine is
running.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
OKH045928N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045929N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043930N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 86
Features of your vehicle
4
4-87
Press start button with smart key
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check headlamp LED (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the headlamp does not turned on
normally when you turn the head
lamp on.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Check headlamp FAN (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the headlamp is overheated.
It means, the headlamp fan does
not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
OKH045513N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045514N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045931N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 87
Features of your vehicle
4-88
Check battery voltage
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery voltage is abnormally
low, or the battery has poor per-
formance. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to P or N to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
OKH043515N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045932N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043933N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 88
Features of your vehicle
4
4-89
✽ NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Press START button and Shift to P
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to turn off the engine with-
out the shift lever in P (Park) posi-
tion.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
• Set the Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position, then shift to P
(Park) by pressing the P button on
the top of the shift lever.
Door / Hood / Trunk Open
• It means that any door, hood, or
trunk is open.
OKH043924N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043934N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 89
Features of your vehicle
4-90
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.
Heated Steering Wheel On
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you turn on the heated steering
wheel.
❈For more details, refer to "Heated
Steering Wheel" in this chapter.
Heated Steering Wheel Off
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you turn off the heated steering
wheel.
❈For more details, refer to "Heated
Steering Wheel" in this chapter.
OKH043402N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045430N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045431N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 90
Features of your vehicle
4
4-91
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
❈For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
Low Tire Pressure
• This warning message illuminates
if the tire pressure is low with the
Engine Start/Stop button in ON
position.
❈For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Align steering wheel
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
OKH043938N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045415N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043937N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 91
Features of your vehicle
4-92
Check ECS
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Electronic Control Suspension
(ECS) system. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to "Electronic
Control Suspension (ECS)" in chap-
ter 5.
✽ NOTICE
- ECS Warning
Message
When there is a malfunction with
the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), the Electronic Control
Suspension (ECS) warning message
may illuminate as well as the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light.
Low Washer Fluid
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
OKH045567N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045522N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 92
Features of your vehicle
4
4-93
Check PSB(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Pre-active Seat Belt (PSB) system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to "Seat
Belt" in chapter 3.
Check Smart Cruise Control
System (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
advanced smart cruise control sys-
tem. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control
System" in chapter 5.
Check Active Air Flap System
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if any of following conditions
occurs.
- There is a malfunction with the
active air flap system.
- A foreign substance is stuck in
the air flap.
- The air flap is frozen.
OKH045515N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045517N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045512N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 93
Features of your vehicle
4-94
✽ NOTICE
The warning message "Check
Active Air Flap System" may not be
displayed immediately in colder cli-
mates.
Check AEB system
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the sensor or cover is dirty or
obscured with foreign matter such
as snow. Clean the sensor or cover
by using a soft cloth.
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) System" in chapter 5.
Low Fuel
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminates.
- When the trip computer displays
“--- mile (or km)” as distance to
empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
OKH045518N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045543N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 94
Features of your vehicle
4
4-95
Check high beam assist system
(if equipped)
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction with the head-
lamp. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
OKH045520N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 5:59 PM Page 95
Features of your vehicle
4-96
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
Fuel Economy
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 30 ~ 990 mi or
50 ~ 990 km.
• If the estimated distance is below
30 mi. (50 km), the trip computer will
display “---” as range.
TRIP COMPUTER
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
DRIVE MODE
TRIP B
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
To change the trip mode, press the
, (MOVE) button.
OKH045407N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 96
Features of your vehicle
4
4-97
✽ NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the range function
may not operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the
actual driving distance as it is an
estimate of the available driving
distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-
lons (6 liters) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and con-
dition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK (RESET) but-
ton on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average fuel
economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to ON.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 97
Features of your vehicle
4-98
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range : 0 ~ 50
MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or
km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
OK (RESET) button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the OK (RESET) button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
OKH045408N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 98
Features of your vehicle
4
4-99
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK (RESET) button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
One time driving information mode
This display shows trip distance (1)
and the vehicle can be driven with
the remaining fuel (2).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally.
The information provided is calculat-
ed according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1mi. (1km), the distance to empty (2)
will display as "---" and a refuel mes-
sage will appear (3).
Drive Mode
By selecting the drive mode screen,
the driver can personalize the drive
mode based on vehicle control pref-
erence and driving style.
❈For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in Chapter 5.
OKH043406N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH055149N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 99
Features of your vehicle
4-100
Warning lights
✽ NOTICE -
Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 100
Features of your vehicle
4
4-101
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in
chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized K900 Kia
dealer and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
illuminates with the parking brake
released, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 101
Features of your vehicle
4-102
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking, thereby
increasing the risk of a crash
and injury.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 102
Features of your vehicle
4
4-103
✽ NOTICE
- Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized K900 Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION
Catalytic Converter
Damage
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential
catalytic converter damage is
possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 103
Features of your vehicle
4-104
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the elec-
trical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
• When your vehicle is overheated,
the color of the engine coolant
temperature symbol will change
(white → red). (for type B cluster)
Engine Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 104
Features of your vehicle
4
4-105
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
If the warning light stays on while the
engine is running, it indicates that
there may be serious engine dam-
age or malfunction. In this case,
1.Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2.Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level.
3.Start the engine again. If the warn-
ing light stays on after the engine is
started, turn the engine off immedi-
ately. In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty,
the color of the fuel level symbol
will change (white → orange). (for
type B cluster)
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Engine damage
If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light is illu-
minated, severe damage could
result.
CAUTION
Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “E” can cause the
engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter
(if equipped).
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 105
Features of your vehicle
4-106
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tires
are displayed on the LCD display).
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking on and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
Low tire pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 106
Features of your vehicle
4
4-107
Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Warning
light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the AEB system is turned
off.
• When the radar or its cover is
stained. Remove the stains with a
soft cloth.
• When there is a malfunction with
AEB. In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates
• When there is a malfunction on the
pre-active seat belt, low washer,
electronic control suspension, or
advanced smart cruise control. To
identify the details of the warning,
look at the LCD display.
Door Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk is not closed securely.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 107
Features of your vehicle
4-108
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light remains
on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
LED Headlamp Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlamp.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
This warning light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with a
LED headlamp related part.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Continuous driving with the LED
Headlamp Warning Light on or
blinking can reduce LED headlamp
(low beam) life.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 108
Features of your vehicle
4
4-109
Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
- Electric Parking
Brake (EPB)
Warning Light
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
Warning Light may illuminate when
the Electronic Stability control
(ESC) Indicator Light comes on to
indicate that the ESC is not working
properly (This does not indicate
malfunction of the EPB).
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
❈For more details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in chapter 5.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 109
Features of your vehicle
4-110
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
❈For more details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in chapter 5.
AUTO HOLD Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Auto
Hold” in chapter 5.
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 5.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 110
Features of your vehicle
4
4-111
SNOW Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select "SNOW" mode as
drive mode.
❈For more details, refer to "Drive
mode integrated control system" in
chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select "SPORT" mode
as drive mode.
❈For more details, refer to "Drive
mode integrated control system" in
chapter 5.
Smart Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select “SMART” mode
as drive mode.
The Smart Mode indicator will illumi-
nate in three different colors- Green
(SMART ECO MODE), White
(SMART NORMAL MODE), Red
(SMART SPORT MODE), depending
on real time driving mode.
❈For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in Chapter 5.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 111
Features of your vehicle
4-112
ECO Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the Active ECO system is
activated by pressing the DRIVE
mode button.
• The ECO indicator (green) will illu-
minate to show that the Active
ECO is operating.
❈For more detailed information,
refer to “Drive Mode Integrated
Control System" in chapter 5.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 112
Features of your vehicle
4
4-113
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in chapter
5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illu-
minate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 113
Features of your vehicle
4-114
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
❈For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
❈For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 114
Features of your vehicle
4
4-115
Description
The head up display is a transparent
display which projects a shadow of
some information of the instrument
cluster and navigation on the wind-
shield glass.
• The head up display image on the
windshield glass may be invisible
when:
- Sitting posture is bad.
- Wearing polarized sunglasses.
- There is an object on the dash
covering the Heads Up Display.
- Driving on a wet road.
- A light is turned on inside the
vehicle.
- Light reflecting off the windshield
in the area of the Head Up
Display.
• If the head up display image is not
shown well, adjust the height, rota-
tion or illumination of the head up
display in the LCD display.
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
• When the head up display needs
inspection or repair, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• Do not place any accessories on
the clash pad or attach any objects
on the windshield glass.
✽ NOTICE
Installing window tint or any other
type of metallic coating on the wind-
shield can prevent the driver from
seeing the Head Up Display images.
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043164N
Head up display
The Head up display is a sup-
plemental system. Do not sole-
ly rely on the system, always
drive safely, and pay attention
to the driving conditions on the
road.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 115
Features of your vehicle
4-116
✽ NOTICE
Prior to replacing the wind shield in
a vehicle equipped with the Head up
display, ensure the glass used is
designed to properly display the
Head up display images to ensure
proper operation of the system.
Head Up Display ON/OFF
To activate the head up display,
press the HUD button.
If you press the HUD button again, the
head up display will be deactivated.
Head Up Display Information
1.Turn By Turn navigation information
2.Road signs
3.Speedometer
4.Cruise setting speed
5.Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) information (if equipped)
6.Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) information (if equipped)
7.Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system
information (if equipped)
8.Warning lights (Low fuel, BSD)
OKH043165N OKH045167N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 116
Features of your vehicle
4
4-117
Head Up Display Setting
On the LCD display, you can change
the head up display settings as fol-
lows.
1. Display height
2. Rotation
3. Brightness
4. Contents select
5. Speedometer size
6. Speedometer color
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 117
Features of your vehicle
4-118
The Parking Assist System is not a
substitute for proper and safe parking
and backing-up procedures. Always
drive safely and use caution when
parking. The Parking Assist System
may not detect every object behind or
in front of the vehicle.
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle
by chiming if any object is sensed
within the distance of 39 in (100 cm)
in front or behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. When the vehicle moving, pay
attention to your surroundings.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the
parking assist button is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
• The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the
parking assist system when you
shift the gear to the R (Reverse)
position.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
OKH045168N
OKH045169N
Sensor
■ Front
■ Rear
Sensor
OKH043170N
Parking assist system
Never rely solely on the parking
assist system. Always perform
a visual inspection to make
sure the vehicle is clear of all
obstructions before moving the
vehicle in any direction. Stop
immediately if you are aware of
a child anywhere near your
vehicle. Some objects may not
be detected by the sensors, due
to the object's size or material.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 118
Features of your vehicle
4
4-119
• The sensing distance while backing
up is approximately 39 in. (100 cm)
when you are driving less than 6.2
mph (10 km/h).
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 39 in. (100
cm) when you are driving less than
6.2 mph (10 km/h).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
✽ NOTICE
The system may not detect and
object if the distance from the object
is already less than approximately
10 in. (25 cm) when the system is
turned ON.
Types of warning sound and indicator
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
39 in. ~ 24 in.
(100cm~61cm)
Front - -
47 in. ~ 24 in.
(120cm~61cm)
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
24 in. ~ 12 in.
(60cm~31cm)
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
12 in.
(30cm)
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
✽ NOTICE
The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status.
If the indicator blinks, the system should be checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 119
Features of your vehicle
4-120
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1.Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.)
2.Sensor is covered with foreign mat-
ter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3.Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water.
(Sensing range will return to nor-
mal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1.Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2.Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
3.Heavy rain or water spray.
4.Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5.Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1.Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2.Undetectable objects smaller than
39 in (1 m) and narrower than 5.5
in (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1.Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2.Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 120
Features of your vehicle
4
4-121
✽ NOTICE
1.The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
2.The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3.Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 12 in (30 cm) from the
sensor, or it may sense an incor-
rect distance. Use with caution.
4.When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a soft
cloth.
5.Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽ NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the system’s
capabilities and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the shift lever
into the R (Reverse) position, this
may indicate a malfunction in the
parking assist system. If this occurs,
have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist sys-
tem. Always drive safely and cau-
tiously.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:00 PM Page 121
Features of your vehicle
4-122
The Rear-Camera Display is not a
substitute for proper and safe back-
ing-up procedures. The Rear-Camera
Display may not display every object
behind the vehicle. Always drive safe-
ly and use caution when backing up.
The rear camera display will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
Engine Start/Stop Button ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the navigation display while backing-
up.
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
the lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
✽ NOTICE
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to assist
the driver in identifying objects
directly behind the middle of the
vehicle. The camera does NOT cover
the complete area behind the vehi-
cle.
REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH045175N
OKH045174N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH045263N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 122
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-123
Backing up & using camera
Never rely solely on the rear
view camera when backing. You
must always use methods of
viewing the area behind you
including looking over both
shoulders as well as continu-
ously checking all three rear
view mirrors. Due to the difficul-
ty of ensuring that the area
behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 123
Features of your vehicle
4-124
The Parking Guide System is not a
substitute for proper and safe park-
ing procedures. The Parking Guide
System may not detect every object
surrounding the vehicle. Always drive
safely and use caution when parking.
The Parking Guide System (PGS)
will activate when the back-up light is
ON with the Engine Start/Stop
Button ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
✽ NOTICE
The park guide system is not a safe-
ty device. It only serves to assist the
driver in in parking the vehicle. It is
the responsibility of the driver to
always check the area around the
vehicle when parking the vehicle.
Parking guide system (PGS)
display
1.Changing rear view angle
(Top/Normal)
Changes the view angle of the rear
camera.
2. Parking guide line
According to steering angle, the
parking guide line displays to help
parking.
PARKING GUIDE SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH045175N
OKH045174N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH045263N
OKH043304N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 124
Features of your vehicle
4
4-125
Changing rear view angle
1. Top view
When Top View is selected, the rear
view angle is displayed as if looking
down from above.
2. Normal view
When Normal View is selected, the
rear view angle is displayed in a cus-
tomary view with a normal rear view
perspective.
OKH043305N
OKH043306N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 125
Features of your vehicle
4-126
The Blind Spot Detection System is
not a substitute for proper and safe
lane changing procedures. Always
drive safely and use caution when
changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Detection System may not detect
every object alongside the vehicle.
Front blind spot monitoring system is
a supplemental system that shows
blind spot in front of the vehicle
through the AV monitor.
The front blind spot monitoring sys-
tem will operate when you press the
button and shift the shift lever into
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) while driving
less then 6.2mph (10km/h).
✽ NOTICE
The front blind spot monitoring sys-
tem may not operate normally, when
you drive in the extremely high or low
temperature area. (operating temper-
ature: -4°F ~ 149°F (-20°C~65°C))
FRONT BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043172N
OKH045173N
Blind Spot Monitoring
Limitations
• The Blind Spot Monitoring
System (BSM) is a supple-
mental system. Do not solely
rely on the system but always
pay attention to drive safely.
• The BSM System may not
detect every object and is not
a substitute for proper and
safe lane changing proce-
dures. Always drive safely
and use caution when chang-
ing lanes.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 126
Features of your vehicle
4
4-127
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) is not a substitute for
proper and safe parking procedures.
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) may not detect every
object surrounding the vehicle.
Always drive safely and use caution
when parking.
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) can assist in parking
by allowing the driver to see around
the vehicle. Push the button into the
[ON] position to operate the system.
To cancel the system, push the but-
ton again.
Operating conditions
- When the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON position
- When the transaxle is on D, N or R
- When the vehicle speed is not over
12.4 mph (20km/h)
• When the vehicle speed is over
12.4mph (20km/h), the SVM sys-
tem is turned off. If the vehicle
speed is not over 12.4mph (20km/h)
after turning off the SVM by over
speed, the SVM is not turned on. To
operate again, push the button.
• When the vehicle moves back-
wards, regardless of On/Off of but-
ton and vehicle speed, the SVM is
operated.
• When the trunk and driver/passen-
ger door are opened and the out-
side mirror is folded, the warning is
illuminated in SVM system.
• If the SVM system is not operating
normally, the system should be
checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
SURROUND VIEW MONITORING SYSTEM (SVM) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043184N
This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the area around the vehi-
cle before and while moving.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 127
Features of your vehicle
4-128
Puddle lamp
When all the doors (and trunk) are
locked and closed, the puddle lamp
will come on for about 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Also, if the outside rearview mirror
folding switch is in the AUTO posi-
tion, the outside rearview mirror will
unfold automatically.
Headlight
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and
all doors (and trunk) are locked and
closed, the position light and head-
light will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the position light and
headlight will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
WELCOME SYSTEM
OKH045285N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 128
Features of your vehicle
4
4-129
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver turns off the engine and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will be turned off automatically if
the driver parks on the side of the
road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the engine is turned OFF,
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Headlight escort function
If you turn the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ACC or OFF position
with the headlights ON, the head-
lights (and/or tail lights) remain on for
about 5 minutes. However, if the dri-
ver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the smart
key twice or turning the light switch to
the OFF or Auto position.
However, if you turn the light switch
to the Auto position when it is dark
outside, the headlights will not be
turned off.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, It causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 129
Features of your vehicle
4-130
Daytime running light
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many dif-
ferent driving conditions, and it is
especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The headlight switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
3. The front fog light is ON.
4. Engaging the Parking Brake
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF or DRL OFF position
(2) Auto light position
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position
OKH043189N
OKH043509N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 130
Features of your vehicle
4
4-131
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail and license
lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position, the head, tail and
license lights will turn ON.
✽ NOTICE
The Engine Start/Stop Button must
be in the ON position to turn on the
headlights.
Auto light/AFLS position
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
OKH043192N
OKH043190N
OKH043191N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 131
Features of your vehicle
4-132
If your vehicle is equipped with the
adaptive front lighting system
(AFLS), it will also operate when the
headlamp is ON.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the Auto light system
may not work properly.
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle speed,
to keep your field of vision wide by
swiveling and leveling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON. To
turn off the AFLS, change the switch
to other positions. After turning the
AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no
longer occurs, but leveling operates
continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator remains on, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
OKH043188N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043187N
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel, this will
ensure better auto-light sys-
tem control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 132
Features of your vehicle
4
4-133
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will illumi-
nate when the headlight high beams
are switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
OKH043193N
OKH043194N
High Beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 133
Features of your vehicle
4-134
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The Engine Start/Stop Button must
be ON position for the turn signals to
function. To turn on the turn signals,
move the lever up or down (A). The
green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal
is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in “One
touch turn lamp” of “User setting”.
Refer to “User setting” in chapter 4.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
OKH043196N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 134
Features of your vehicle
4
4-135
Front fog light
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
1. Turn on the head light.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3. To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the head
light.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor or unnec-
essary battery and generator drain
could occur.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Automatic type
To ensure the proper headlight beam
is used under various conditions, the
headlight beam levels are automati-
cally adjusted depending on the
number of passengers, the weight in
the trunk, and other driving condi-
tions.
✽ NOTICE
If the automatic headlight leveling
device is not working properly have
your vehicle inspected by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH043197N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 135
Features of your vehicle
4-136
Windshield wiper/washer
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· AUTO – AUTO control wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Auto control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is turned ON.
MIST: For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it with the lever in the
OFF position. The wipers will
operate continuously if the
lever is pushed upward and
held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
AUTO : The rain sensor located on
the upper end of the wind-
shield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and con-
trols the wiping cycle for the
proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain
stops, the wiper stops. To
vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (B).
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OKH043516N OKH043198N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 136
Features of your vehicle
4
4-137
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls the
wiping cycle for the proper interval.
The more it rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain stops, the
wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON, the wiper will operate
once to perform a self-check of the
system. Set the wiper to OFF posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
When the engine Start/Stop but-
ton is ON and the windshield
wiper switch is placed in the
AUTO mode, use caution in the
following situations to avoid
damaging the rain sensors on
the windshield:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch to the OFF posi-
tion so the auto wiper will not
operate.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in win-
ter, set the wiper switch in the
OFF position. Otherwise, wipers
may operate and ice may dam-
age the windshield wiper blades.
Always remove all snow and ice
and defrost the windshield prop-
erly prior to operating the wind-
shield wipers.
CAUTION
OKH043517N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 137
Features of your vehicle
4-138
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
Washer Pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
CAUTION
Wipers & Windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use
gasoline, kerosene, paint thin-
ner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers and washer sys-
tem, use anti-freezing washer
fluids in the winter season or
cold weather.
CAUTION
Obscured Visibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on contact
with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
WARNING
OKH043199N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 138
Features of your vehicle
4
4-139
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turns off several sec-
onds after the system is armed.
Front lamp switch
• : Press the button to turn the
lamp on. This light produces
a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night
or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front pas-
senger. To turn the lamp off,
press the button again.
• ROOM: Press the button to turn
the front and rear lamp on.
To turn the lamp off, press
the button again.
INTERIOR LIGHT
OKH043200N
Interior Lights
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 139
Features of your vehicle
4-140
• REAR ROOM : Press the button to
turn the rear lamp
on. To turn the
lamp off, press the
button again.
• DOOR :
Press the button to operate the door
mode. The indicator on the button will
illuminate and lamps will turn on or off
as follows:
- The front and rear lamp comes
on when a door is opened. If the
door is closed, the lamps will go
out in 30 seconds.
- The front and rear lamp comes
on for approximately 30 seconds
when doors are unlocked with
the smart key as long as the
doors are not opened.
- The front and rear lamp will stay
on for approximately 20 minutes
if a door is opened with the
engine start/stop button in the
ACC or OFF position.
- The front and rear lamp will stay
on continuously if the door is
opened with the engine
start/stop button in the ON posi-
tion.
- The front and rear lamp will go
out immediately if the engine
start/stop button is changed to
the ON position or all doors are
locked.
To turn off the door mode, press the
button again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
• PRIVACY :
Press the button to operate the pri-
vacy mode. The indicator on the but-
ton will illuminate and lamps will turn
on or off as follows:
- If you open any door, the lamp for
the open door will illuminate.
To turn off the privacy mode, press
the button again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
Rear lamp switch
Type A
• : Press the button to turn the
lamp on. This light produces
a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night
or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front pas-
senger. To turn the lamp off,
press the button again.
• ROOM :Press the button to turn
the rear lamp on. To turn
the lamp off, press the but-
ton again.
OKH043201N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 140
Features of your vehicle
4
4-141
Type B
Press the button to turn the rear
lamp on. To turn the lamp off, press
the button again.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the trunk lid
securely after using the trunk room.
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
OKH043307N OKH043203NOKH045202N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 141
Features of your vehicle
4-142
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging sys-
tem drain, close the glove box secure-
ly after using the glove box.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror
will automatically turn on the mirror
light.
Vanity mirror lamp
(if equipped)
Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the
sunvisor is closed without the
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvisor.
CAUTION
OKH043204N OKH043205N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 142
Features of your vehicle
4
4-143
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is turned off. To
turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper de-icer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper de-icer, it will be operating at
the same time you turn on the rear
window defroster.
DEFROSTER
OKH045207N
Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:01 PM Page 143
Features of your vehicle
4-144
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Driver’s temperature control button
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Front windshield defrost button
4. Fan speed control button
5. Mode selection button
6. Air intake control button
7. Passenger’s temperature control button
8. OFF button
9. Rear window defrost button
10. Air conditioning button
11. Synchronize temperature control button
12. Climate information screen selection button
13. Fan speed control button (Rear)
14. OFF button (Rear)
15. LCD display
16. Rear side temperature control knob
17. AUTO (automatic control) button
OKH045208N/OKH043209N
■ Front
■ Rear
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 144
Features of your vehicle
4
4-145
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1.Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2.Press the temperature control but-
ton to set the desired temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any of the following buttons:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The ‘AUTO’
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).
OKH045210N
■ Front
■ Rear
OKH045286N
■ Front
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 145
Features of your vehicle
4-146
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected. When pressing any
button except the AUTO button while
using automatic operation, the func-
tions not selected will be controlled
automatically.
1.Start the engine.
2.Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
OKH043211N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 146
Features of your vehicle
4
4-147
❈ Rear outlet vents (F)
• The air flow of the Rear outlet
vents is controlled by the front cli-
mate control system and delivered
through the inside air duct of the
front doors. If the door is open or
not closed completely, the air flow
of the Rear outlet vent is not deliv-
ered properly. Make sure the front
doors are closed completely.
• The air flow of the Rear outlet
vents may be weaker than the
instrument panel vents for the long
air duct in the front doors.
OKH045213N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 147
Features of your vehicle
4-148
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F, G)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
OKH045212N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 148
Features of your vehicle
4
4-149
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the horizon-
tal thumbwheel. To close the vent,
rotate it left to the maximum position.
To open the vent, rotate it right to the
desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by pushing the up ( )
button (for front) or turn the knob to the
right (for rear).
OKH045214N OKH045215N
OKH045216N
OKH043217N
■ Front
■ Rear
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 149
Features of your vehicle
4-150
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by pushing the down
( ) button (for front) or turn the knob
to the left (for rear).
When pushing the button (for front) or
turning the knob (for rear), the tem-
perature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condition-
ing will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver, passenger and
rear side temperature equally
1. Press the SYNC button to activate
SYNC mode. The passenger and
rear side temperature will be set to
the same temperature as the driv-
er side temperature.
2. Press the driver side temperature
control button. The driver, passen-
ger and rear side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver, passenger and
rear side temperature individually
• Press the SYNC button again to
operate the driver, passenger and
rear side temperature individually.
• Pressing the passenger side tem-
perature control button will auto-
matically cancel the SYNC mode.
At this time, rear side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side.
• Turning the rear temperature con-
trol knob will automatically cancel
the SYNC mode. At this time, pas-
senger side temperature will be set
to the same temperature as the
driver side.
OKH045300N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 150
Features of your vehicle
4
4-151
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
from Centigrade and Fahrenheit as fol-
lows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
When driving at high
speed, the outside air may
come in to circulate the air
inside the vehicle.
To block the air from enter-
ing, press the air intake
control button for about 2
seconds. The outside air
will be blocked from coming
in for 3 minutes.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OKH045219N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 151
Features of your vehicle
4-152
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation
(if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes. When the
sunroof is closed, the air intake posi-
tion will return to the original position
that was selected.
Reduced visibility
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING
Sleeping with AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
WARNING
Recirculated air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 152
Features of your vehicle
4
4-153
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control button(for front) or
turning the fan speed control knob
(for rear).
To change the fan speed, press the
( ) part of the button for higher
speed or press the ( ) part of the
button for lower speed. (for front)
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed, or
left for lower speed. (for rear)
To turn the fan speed control off,
press the OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
• Press the front OFF button to turn
off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as
long as the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in the ON position.
• Press the rear OFF button to turn
off the air coming out of the rear
console vent.
OKH045222N
OKH045221N
■ Front
■ Rear
OKH045223N
■ Front
■ Rear
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 153
Features of your vehicle
4-154
Climate information screen selec-
tion (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
Rear control lock
You can activate or deactivate the
rear seat control, rear audio control
and climate control by using the
REAR LOCK button on the rear arm-
rest or “System Settings” in the AVN
(Audio, Video, and Navigation).
Detailed information for the “System
Settings” is described in a separately
supplied manual.
If the rear control button has deacti-
vated through AVN, you can reacti-
vate the rear control button only
through AVN.
System operation
Ventilation
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5.If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
OKH033040N
OKH045224N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 154
Features of your vehicle
4
4-155
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
The K900 Air Conditioning System is
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1.Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2.Set the mode to the position.
3.Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4.Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
Excessive A/C
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine
coolant closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating
and potential engine damage.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the engine coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 155
Features of your vehicle
4-156
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:02 PM Page 156
Features of your vehicle
4
4-157
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
OXM063009
■ Example
The oil and refriger-
ant in your vehicle's
air conditioning sys-
tem is under very
high pressure. If
proper service procedures are
not followed an explosion may
result. To reduce the risk of seri-
ous injury or death, the air con-
ditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified techni-
cians.
WARNING
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may
occur. To prevent damage, the
air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced
by trained and certified techni-
cians.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 157
Features of your vehicle
4-158
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
To defog inside windshield
1.Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2.Select desired temperature.
3.Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi-
ent temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
OKH045225N
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 158
Features of your vehicle
4
4-159
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1.Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2.Set the temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3.Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi-
ent temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
OKH045226N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 159
Features of your vehicle
4-160
1. Turn the Engine Start/Stop Button
to the ON position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto Defogging System
Auto Defogging reduces the proba-
bility of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The Auto Defogging System oper-
ates when the heater or air condi-
tioning is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the Auto Defogging
System senses moisture
inside the windshield and
the Auto Defogging
System starts to operate.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 2
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 1 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
Step 1 :Operating the air condition-
ing
Step 2 :Outside air position
Step 3 :Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 :Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
OKH043228N
OKH045227N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 160
Features of your vehicle
4
4-161
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position. When the Auto Defogging
System is canceled, Front defroster
button will blink 6 times.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, Front defroster button will blink
3 times without a signal.
✽ NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air
position is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the
auto defogging indicator will blink 3
times to give notice that manual
operation is canceled.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 161
Features of your vehicle
4-162
Auto defogging system
ON/OFF
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automat-
ically activated when the conditions
are met.
However, if you would like to cancel
the auto defogging system, turn off
the Auto defogging function in the
AVN climate monitor.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽ NOTICE
When the air conditioning is turned
on and the outside air position is
selected by the auto defogging sys-
tem, if you try to turn off the air con-
ditioning and select the recirculated
air position, the indicator will blink
3 times and the air conditioning will
not be turned off and recirculated
air position will not be selected.
OKH045578N
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 162
Features of your vehicle
4
4-163
Cluster ionizer
When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position, the clean air
function turns on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the OFF posi-
tion.
Smart ventilation
When driving and the heater and air
conditioning system is off, the smart
ventilation system maintains pleas-
ant indoor aerial environment by
controlling the temperature, humidity
and CO2 of interior.
“SMART VENTILATION ON” mes-
sage is displayed on the AVN climate
monitor for 5 seconds when the
smart ventilation system operates.
Smart ventilation system ON/OFF
If you would like to cancel the smart
ventilation system, turn off the Smart
ventilation in the AVN climate moni-
tor.
Rear climate system ON/OFF
If you would like to cancel the rear
climate system, turn off the rear cli-
mate in the AVN climate monitor.
CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH045579N OKH045580N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 163
Features of your vehicle
4-164
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
✽ NOTICE
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage com-
partments.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover cannot close securely.
Center console storage
■ Type A
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
■ Type B(if equipped)
To open the center console storage,
press the button.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
OKH043231N
Flammable materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
OKH045600N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 164
Features of your vehicle
4
4-165
Rear seat storage
To open the rear seat storage, pull up
the lever.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key of
the smartkey (1).
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (2) and the glove box will auto-
matically open. Close the glove box
after use.
OKH043232NOKH043275N
Glove Box Door
To help reduce the risk of injury
in an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 165
Features of your vehicle
4-166
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder push it
up.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
OKH033016N
Sunglass holder
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Heavier objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injur-
ing the passengers.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or defor-
mation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
WARNING
OKH043233N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 166
Features of your vehicle
4
4-167
Map pocket
The map pocket is provided on the
doors.
OKH043292N
Seatback pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the air
bag sensing system.
WARNING
Be careful not to nip fingers
when using the pocket.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 167
Features of your vehicle
4-168
Cup holder
✽ NOTICE
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle’s electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage electri-
cal/ electronic parts.
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OKH043236N
OKH043237N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you could
be burned. Such a burn to the
driver could lead to loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 168
Features of your vehicle
4
4-169
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket.
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
Power outlet
OKH043301N
OKH043239N
■ Center
■ Rear
■ Front
OKH043240N
OKH043238N
Vanity mirror lamp
If you use the vanity mirror
lamp, turn off the lamp before
returning the sunvisor to its
original position. It could result
in battery discharge and possi-
ble sunvisor damage.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 169
Features of your vehicle
4-170
The power outlets provide power for
mobile telephones or other devices
designed to operate with the vehi-
cle's electrical systems. These
devices should draw less than 10
amps while the engine is running.
• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged peri-
ods of time with the engine off
could cause the battery to dis-
charge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and mal-
functions in other electronic sys-
tems or devices used in your vehi-
cle.
Electric Shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 170
Features of your vehicle
4
4-171
Seat warmer
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the seats during cold weather. With
the engine start/stop button in the
ON position, push the switch to warm
the seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the engine
start/stop button is turned on.
• You can activate or deactivate the
rear seat warmer button by using
the REAR LOCK button on the rear
armrest or “System Settings” in
AVN (Audio, Video, and Navigation).
Detailed information for “System
Settings” is described in a separate-
ly supplied manual. If the REAR
LOCK button activated (LED “ON”),
you can not activate the rear seat
warmer button.
After deactivating (LED “OFF”) the
REAR LOCK button, you can acti-
vate the rear seat warmer button.
If the REAR LOCK button has acti-
vated through AVN, you can deac-
tivate the REAR LOCK button only
through AVN.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OKH033013N
OKH033034N
■ Rear seat (Type A)
■ Rear seat (Type B)
■ Front seat
OKH033042N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 171
Features of your vehicle
4-172
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The air ventilation is provided to cool
the seats during hot weather by
blowing air through small vent holes
on the surface of the seats and seat-
backs. While the engine is running,
press the switch to cool the seat.
OKH033014N
OKH033043N
■ Front seat
■ Rear seat
Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the
surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers on the seats while the
seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the seat
warmer system.
CAUTION
Seat warmer burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passen-
gers who may not be able to
take care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns. These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medica-
tion that can cause drowsi-
ness or sleepiness (sleeping
pills, cold tablets, etc.)
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 172
Features of your vehicle
4
4-173
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion is not needed, keep the switches
in the OFF position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the airflow will change as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
cooler operating, the seat cooler
will turn OFF.
• When the air ventilation seat is
turned on, the seat may get cooler
after about 5 minutes.
• Because the air ventilation uses
the air in the vehicle, cooling effi-
ciency depends on the tempera-
ture of the air. In order to improve
cooling efficiency, use the air con-
ditioning system together.
• The air ventilation seat defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
Engine Start/Stop Button is turned
to the ON position.
• You can activate or deactivate the
rear air ventilation button by using
the REAR LOCK button on the rear
armrest or “System Settings” in
AVN (Audio, Video, and
Navigation). Detailed information
for “System Settings” is described
in a separately supplied manual. If
the REAR LOCK button activated
(LED “ON”), you can not activate
the rear air ventilation button.
After deactivating (LED “OFF”) the
REAR LOCK button, you can acti-
vate the rear air ventilation button.
If the REAR LOCK button has acti-
vated through AVN, you can deacti-
vate the REAR LOCK button only
through AVN.
• The air ventilation seat is a supple-
mentary cooling/heating system.
Use the air ventilation seat when
the climate control system is on.
Using the air ventilation seat for
prolonged periods of time with the
climate control system off could
cause the air ventilation seat per-
formance to impair.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. The air vent may not
work properly as the air intake can
be blocked.
✽ NOTICE
When the air vent does not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the
surface of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the
surface of the front seats and
seatbacks, or the air vent
holes may be blocked and
prevented from working prop-
erly.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:03 PM Page 173
Features of your vehicle
4-174
✽ NOTICE -
Air intake
There is an air intake for the rear air
ventilation at the lower part of the
rear center seatback. If the air
intake is blocked, efficiency of the
rear air ventilation will be lower. Be
careful not to block the air intake.
Clock
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
You can set the clock by using the
AVN (Audio or Navigation)
For the details, refer to the AVN man-
ual.
OKH045241N
Clock Setting Distraction
Do not adjust the clock while
driving. Such adjustments may
distract you for too long from
the roadway and lead to a colli-
sion.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 174
Features of your vehicle
4
4-175
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.
OKH043511N
OPS046500
OKH043510N
Hanging clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
CAUTION
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothe pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 175
Features of your vehicle
4-176
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat in the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. ,all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
Rear vanity mirror (if equipped)
To use the rear vanity mirror, press
the cover and it will slowly open and
the mirror lamp will turn on.
OKH043289N
Close the mirror cover securely.
If the mirror cover is not closed,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and
possible mirror damage.
CAUTION
Secured Floor Mats
The floor mat must be properly
anchored so that it will not
interfere with the operation of
the accelerator pedal. Any inter-
ference with the accelerator
pedal could cause the accelera-
tor pedal to be unable to return
to the idle position. A pedal that
cannot return to the idle posi-
tion could lead to an accident
which may result in severe per-
sonal injury or death.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 176
Features of your vehicle
4
4-177
Bag hanger (if equipped)
Pull the strap (1) to hang a bag on
the hook (2).
When you are not using the hook,
fold the hook.
Luggage net (holder)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
OKH043269N
To prevent damage to the vehi-
cle, care should be taken when
carrying fragile or bulky objects
in the luggage compartment.
CAUTION
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
WARNING
OKH045242N
Do not hang heavy things, since
those may damage the hook.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 177
Features of your vehicle
4-178
Rear curtain (if equipped)
To raise the rear curtain, depress the
button. To lower the rear curtain,
depress the button again.
The rear curtain will be lowered auto-
matically when you shift the shift
lever into R (Reverse) and raised
automatically when you shift the shift
lever from R (Reverse) into P (Park).
After the rear curtain is lowered by
shifting the shift lever into R
(Reverse), if you drive more than
12mph (20km/h) with the shift lever
in D (Drive), the rear curtain will be
raised automatically.
You can activate or deactivate the
rear curtain button on the rear arm-
rest by using the REAR LOCK button
on the rear armrest or “System
Settings” in AVN (Audio, Video, and
Navigation).
Detailed information for “System
Settings” is described in a separately
supplied manual.
If the REAR LOCK button activated
(LED “ON”), you can not activate the
rear curtain button.
After deactivating (LED “OFF”) the
REAR LOCK button, you can acti-
vate the rear curtain button.
If the REAR LOCK button has acti-
vated through AVN, you can deacti-
vate the REAR LOCK button only
through AVN.
Do not lower or raise the rear
curtain by hand. It could cause
motor failure.
CAUTION
OKH043243N
OKH043244N
OKH043267N
■ Rear
■ Front
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 178
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1.Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2.Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook.
3.Pull the curtain backward by the
hook (2).
4.Hang the curtain on the hook.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-179
OKH043268N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 179
Features of your vehicle
4-180
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
iPod
®
port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and a USB
port to plug in a USB, and an iPod
®
port to plug in an iPod
®
.
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod
®
is a Registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
USB charger
The USB charger is designed to
recharge batteries of small size elec-
trical devices using a USB cable. The
electrical devices can be recharged
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in ACC/ON/START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
USB port after use.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OKH045545N
OKH045248N
OKH045276N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 180
Features of your vehicle
4
4-181
• Some devices are not supported
for fast charging but will be
charged with normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the
engine is running to prevent bat-
tery discharge.
• Only devices that fits the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only
for battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be
charged.
Audio / Video / Navigation sys-
tem (AVN)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
Driver Information System
(DIS)
Detailed information for the DIS sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
OKH045271NOKH045270N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 181
Features of your vehicle
4-182
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology hands-free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1. Call / Answer lever
2. Call end lever
3. Microphone
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the manu-
al supplied separately.
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A compatible
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell
phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Antenna
Shark fin antenna (1)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.
Glass antenna (2)
Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
receive both AM and FM signals.
OKH043249N
OKH043303N
OKH046290N
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 182
Features of your vehicle
4
4-183
Steering wheel audio control
The steering wheel audio control but-
ton is installed to promote safe driving.
VOLUME (VOL + / VOL -) (1)
• Press the up button (VOL+) to
increase volume.
• Press the down button (VOL-) to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
ferent functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 0.8 sec-
onds or more.
OKH045246N
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a clean-
er or use a scraper to remove
foreign deposits as this may
cause damage to the antenna
elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and
FM broadcast signals.
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean
the window. Clean the inside
surface of the rear glass window
with a piece of soft cloth.
• When putting a sticker on the
inside surface of the rear win-
dow, be careful not to damage to
the rear glass antenna.
• Do not put sharp instruments
nearby the rear glass antenna.
• Tinted rear window may affect
the proper functioning of the
antenna.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
CAUTION
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 183
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod
®
mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod
®
mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, DISC, USB or AUX.
When the AV is OFF and the MODE
button is pressed for less than 0.8
second, the AV will turn on.
When the AV is ON and the MODE
button is press for more than 0.8 sec-
ond, the AV will turn off.
MUTE (4)
• Move the MUTE lever up to cancel
the sound.
• Move the MUTE lever up again to
activate the sound.
Detailed information is described in a
separately supplied manual.
4-184
Features of your vehicle
KH USA 4:2018 4/18/2017 6:04 PM Page 184
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving your vehicle
Before driving......................................................5-4
• Before entering vehicle............................................5-4
• Necessary inspections ..........................................5-4
• Before starting ........................................................5-4
Engine START/STOP button...............................5-6
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button..............5-6
• ENGINE START/STOP button position...................5-6
Starting the engine .............................................5-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key ......................5-9
Automatic transmission (shift by cable)............5-11
• Automatic transmission operation.........................5-11
• Good driving practices ..........................................5-15
Automatic transmission (shift by wire)..............5-16
• Automatic transmission operation.........................5-16
• Good driving practices ..........................................5-26
Brake system....................................................5-27
• Power brakes ......................................................5-27
• Electric parking brake (EPB).................................5-31
• AUTO HOLD..........................................................5-37
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...............................5-41
• Electronic stability control (ESC)...........................5-43
• Hill-start assist control (HAC)................................5-47
• Good braking practices.........................................5-47
Autonomus Emergency Braking (AEB).............5-49
• AEB Operation.........................................................5-49
• To cancel the AEB....................................................5-51
• Warning light and message .....................................5-52
Drive mode integrated control system..............5-54
• DRIVE mode / SNOW mode.................................5-54
• ECO MODE Driving ..............................................5-55
• Conditions that limit Active ECO MODE...............5-55
• DRIVE MODE Indicator Screen............................5-58
Cruise control system.......................................5-62
• Cruise control switch.............................................5-63
• To set cruise control speed...................................5-63
• To increase cruise control set speed ....................5-64
• To decrease the cruising speed............................5-64
• To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on ...........................................5-64
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following..5-65
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) ........................5-65
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following ..5-66
Advanced Smart Cruise Control System..........5-67
• Speed setting (ASCC)...........................................5-68
• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC)...........5-72
• To convert to cruise control mode.........................5-76
• Limitations of the system ......................................5-76
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)........5-82
• Warning indicator .................................................5-84
• The LDWS does not operate when.......................5-84
5
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 1
Blind Spot Detection System (BSD).................5-86
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) .................................5-87
• RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)..............................5-90
• Non-operating condition........................................5-92
Economical operation.......................................5-94
Special driving conditions.................................5-96
• Hazardous driving conditions................................5-96
• Rocking the vehicle...............................................5-96
• Smooth cornering..................................................5-97
• Driving at night......................................................5-97
• Driving in the rain..................................................5-98
• Driving in flooded areas ........................................5-98
• Driving off-road......................................................5-99
• Highway driving.....................................................5-99
Winter driving..................................................5-100
• Snowy or Icy conditions ......................................5-100
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant.............5-102
• Check battery and cables ...................................5-102
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary..........5-103
• Check spark plugs and ignition system ..............5-103
• To keep locks from freezing ................................5-103
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system............................................................5-103
• Don't let your parking brake freeze.....................5-103
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath..5-103
• Carry emergency equipment...............................5-104
Trailer Towing..................................................5-104
Vehicle load limit.............................................5-105
• Tire and loading information label.......................5-105
• Certification label.................................................5-108
Vehicle weight.................................................5-110
5
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 2
Driving your vehicle
5
5-3
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Engine exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged
time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause unconscious-
ness and death by asphyxiation.
WARNING
Open trunk
Do not drive with the trunk
open.
Poisonous exhaust gases can
enter the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the
trunk open proceed as follows:
1.Close all windows.
2.Open side vents.
3.Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
WARNING
California proposition 65
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 3
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Section 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the Engine Start/Stop
button is turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
Distracted driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsi-
bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any hand held devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the driver should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
WARNING
Check surrounding
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 4
Driving your vehicle
5
5-5
Driving while intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
WARNING
Loose object
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING
Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause a fire.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 5
5-6
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/STOP
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE START/STOP
button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position. When you press the
ENGINE START/STOP button without
the shift lever in the P (Park) position,
the ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively within
3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
OKH055001N
White
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 6
Driving your vehicle
5
5-7
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and
electrical accessories are opera-
tional.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal, the
engine will not start and the button
will change as follows:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF
Orange
Red
Not illuminated
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 7
5-8
Driving your vehicle
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON posi-
tion for a long time, the battery will
discharge.
Starting vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in on
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 8
Driving your vehicle
5
5-9
Starting the engine with a
smart key
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park).
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds.(Steep accelerating
and decelerating should be avoid-
ed).
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without depress-
ing the accelerator.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, but is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehi-
cle,the “ ” indicator will blink or
the warning "Key not in vehicle" will
illuminate on the LCD display. And
if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for 5 seconds. The indi-
cator or warning will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Always have
the smart key with you.
The engine will start only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Proper footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may inter-
fere with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 9
5-10
Driving your vehicle
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC position.
The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
OKH055003N
Unintended vehicle move-
ment
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 10
Driving your vehicle
5
5-11
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has 8
forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are
selected automatically, depending on
the position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle
or if the battery has been discon-
nected, may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and the
shifting sequence will adjust after
shifts are cycled a few times by the
TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (SHIFT BY CABLE)
OKH053007N
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
Lock release
button
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the button when shifting.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 11
5-12
Driving your vehicle
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking
brake.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the Engine Start/Stop Button is
in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transmission and
prevents the drive wheels from rotat-
ing.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
Transmission
To avoid damage to your trans-
mission, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on. The transmission
may be damaged if you shift
into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion.
CAUTION
Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle” in this
section.
CAUTION
Leaving the vehicle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is latched in
the P position and set the park-
ing brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 12
Driving your vehicle
5
5-13
- Parking in N (Neutral) gear
Follow below steps when parking
and you want the vehicle to move
when pushed.
1.After stopping your vehicle,
depress the brake pedal and move
the transaxle shift lever to [P] with
the ignition button in [ON] or while
the engine is running.
2.If the parking brake is applied,
release the parking brake.
- For EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) equipped vehicles,
depress the brake pedal with the
ignition button in [ON] or while the
engine is running to disengage
the parking brake. If [AUTO
HOLD] function is used while driv-
ing (If [AUTO HOLD] indicator is
on in the cluster), press [AUTO
HOLD] switch and [AUTO HOLD]
function should be turn off.
3.While depressing the brake pedal,
turn the ignition button [OFF].
- For smart key equipped vehi-
cles, the ignition switch can be
moved to [OFF] only when the
shift lever is in [P].
4.Change the gear shift lever to [N]
(Neutral) while depressing the
brake pedal and inserting, press-
ing down a tool (e.g. flathead
screw-driver) into the [SHIFT
LOCK RELEASE] access hole at
the same time. Then, the vehicle
will move when external force is
applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transmission will auto-
matically shift through a 8-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transmission will
automatically downshift to the next
lower gear.
Parking In Neutral
• With the exception of parking
in neutral gear, always park
the vehicle in [P] (Park) for
safety and apply the parking
brake.
• Before parking in [N] (Neutral)
gear, make sure the parking
ground is level and flat. Do not
park in [N] gear on any slopes
or gradients. If parked and left
in [N], the vehicle may move
and cause serious damage or
injury.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 13
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In manual mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 8 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehicle
slows down. When the vehicle stops,
1st gear is automatically selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side to
shift back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
Shifting from park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to help avoid
inadvertent motion of the vehicle.
WARNING
OKH053008N
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Manual mode
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 14
Driving your vehicle
5
5-15
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
tion into the R (Reverse) position
with the brake pedal depressed, con-
tinue depressing the brake, then do
the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer imme-
diately.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
OKH053009N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 15
5-16
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has 8
forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are
selected automatically, depending on
the position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transmission Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (SHIFT BY WIRE)
OKH053010N
UNLOCK
button
❈ When you shift the transmission, depress the brake pedal with pressing [UNLOCK] button.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:58 AM Page 16
Driving your vehicle
5
5-17
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking
brake.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter and shift lever displays the shift
lever position when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is in the OFF/
ACC/ON position.
Transmission
To avoid damage to your trans-
mission, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on. The transmission
may be damaged if you shift
into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 17
5-18
Driving your vehicle
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transmission and
prevents the drive wheels from rotat-
ing.
To shift the gear from [R], [N], [D] or
[M] to [P], press the [P] button on the
shift lever.
If you turn off the engine in [D], [R] or
[M], the shifting automatically
changes to [P].
If you press the [P] button when the
shifting is on [M] or if you turn the
engine off when the shifting is on [M],
the shift lever is automatically moved
to right side and the shifting is
changed to [P].
When the shift lever is automatically
moved to right side, if you hold the
shift lever by force, the warning mes-
sage will be illuminated in cluster.
Move the shift lever to right side
manually.
When you park the vehicle, press the
[P] button of shift lever with applying
brake pedal and apply the parking
brake.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
To shift the gear to [R] press the
[UNLOCK] button of shift lever with
depressing brake pedal and move
the shift lever forward.
OKH053011N
OKH053013N
OKH053014N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 18
Driving your vehicle
5
5-19
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
In neutral range if you turn off the
engine, the range will be on [N] and
the engine start/stop button position
will be on ACC.
To turn off engine :
1.Press the engine start/stop button
again to the ON position.
2.Press the [P] button on the shift
lever.
3.Press the engine start/stop button
again, the engine start/stop button
will change to the OFF position.
However, when you open the door
with the shift lever in N (Neutral) and
the engine start/stop button in the
ACC position, the shift lever will auto-
matically move to P (Park) and the
engine start/stop button will change
to the OFF position.
OKH053015N
Shifting
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may dam-
age the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehi-
cle is in motion, except as
explained in “Rocking the vehi-
cle” in this section.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 19
5-20
Driving your vehicle
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transmission will auto-
matically shift through a 8-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transmission will
automatically downshift to the next
lower gear.
To shift into [D], depress the brake
pedal and press the [UNLOCK] but-
ton of shift lever. And then move the
shift lever to backward.
To shift into [D], from [N] you must
depress the brake pedal.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual mode is selected
by pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
OKH053018N
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Manual mode
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 20
Driving your vehicle
5
5-21
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 8 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side to
shift back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter(if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-
tion or the sports mode.
OKH055214N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 21
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than 6
mph (10 km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower
than 6 mph (10 km/h), if you depress
the accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you move the shift lever
from D (Drive) to Sports Mode and
move it from Sports Mode to D
(Drive) again, the system changes
from manual mode to automatic
mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
✽ NOTICE
If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are
pulled at the same time, gear change
may not occur.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse) or D (Drive) :
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the Engine
Start / Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
3. Move the shift lever to R (Reverse) or
D (Drive) with pressing [UNLOCK]
button.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
5-22
Driving your vehicle
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 22
Driving your vehicle
5
5-23
■
When the battery is dis-
charged:
When the battery is discharged, the
automatic transmission (shift by wire)
is not shifted.
In emergency, if you want to shift into
[N], follow actions
You can shift into [N] by using the
driver if the jump starting is impossi-
ble to do.
1) Open the storage cover.
2) Remove the rubber on bottom of
storage box.
3) Insert the driver (-) to service hole
as direction of clockwise 10 times.
The shifting is changed to [N]
from [P] position. If you want to
shift to [P] position, turn the driver
counter-clockwise.
OKH053045N
Shifting from park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to help avoid
inadvertent motion of the vehicle.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 23
5-24
Driving your vehicle
1.If the transmission is not operated
as normal, the warning will be illu-
minated. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
2.If the shift lever has some problem
with main system, the warning will
be illuminated. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
OKH053020N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH055019N
■ Type A ■ Type B
If the electric parking brake will
not release, tow the vehicle on a
flatbed to avoid damage to addi-
tional vehicle components.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 24
Driving your vehicle
5
5-25
3.If the shifting condition is not
matched by high engine RPM or
high vehicle speed, the warning
will be illuminated. When you
reduce the engine RPM or vehicle
speed, the shifting will be operat-
ed.
4.When you shift the transmission, if
you do not depress the brake
pedal, the warning will be illuminat-
ed.
5.When you shift into [P], if the vehi-
cle speed is high, warning will be
illuminated. Stop the vehicle at
safe area and shift into [P].
OKH053023N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH055022N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH055021N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 25
5-26
Driving your vehicle
6.When the transmission is fixed on
[M], the warning will be illuminated.
7.While stopping in [D], [R] and [M],
when you get off the vehicle, the
warning will be illuminated for your
safety and the shifting is automati-
cally changed to [P].
If you do not press [UNLOCK] but-
ton, the warning will be illuminated.
OKH053102N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053024N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053025N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 26
Driving your vehicle
5
5-27
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Be sure the car is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the trans-
mission in P (Park) to keep the car
from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive)
or [1st] gear of [M] mode. Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade,
and release the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator gradually
while releasing the service brakes.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 27
5-28
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
Always, confirm the position of the
brake and accelerator pedal before
driving. If you don’t check the posi-
tion of the accelerator and brake
pedal before driving, you may
depress the accelerator instead of
the brake pedal. It may cause a seri-
ous accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
CAUTION
Steep hill braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 28
Driving your vehicle
5
5-29
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes (if
equipped). You may hear this sound
come and go or it may occur when-
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
Parking brake
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emer-
gency situation. Applying the
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
WARNING
Replace brake pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
CAUTION
Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
WARNING
Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 29
5-30
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by
placing the Engine Start/Stop button
to the ON position. (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied
with the Engine Start/Stop button in
the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may
be a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem. Immediate attention is neces-
sary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
WKH-002
Parking Brake Use
• Never allow a passenger to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 30
Driving your vehicle
5
5-31
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
1.Depress the brake pedal.
2.Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the Engine Start/Stop Button is OFF
position. (for shift by cable)
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly when the Engine Start/Stop Button
is OFF position.(for shift by wire)
However, if you press the EPB switch
after the engine is turned off, the
EPB will not be applied.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the
following condition:
• Set the Engine Start/Stop Button in
the ON position.
OKH053031N
OKH053032N
OKH053029N
OKH053030N
Do not operate the parking
brake / EPB while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. Driving with the EPB
activated can cause excessive
brake wear.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 31
5-32
Driving your vehicle
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
To release EPB (electric parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Rear), N (Neutral) or D
(Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine
hood and trunk.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R
(Rear), D (Drive) or M (Manual)
mode.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
✽ NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the Engine
Start/Stop Button is in the OFF
position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with the EPB
switch when you drive downhill or
when backing up the vehicle.
• If the parking brake warning light
is still on even though the EPB has
been released, have the system
checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 32
Driving your vehicle
5
5-33
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
System warning
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but doesn't release auto-
matically, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and the engine hood in [D]
gear or trunk in [R] gear is opened,
a warning will sound and a mes-
sage will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs,
depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
OKH053033N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 33
5-34
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• A click sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB,
but these conditions are normal
and indicate that the EPB is func-
tioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her how
to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelerator
pedal, depress it slowly.
System warning
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
✽ NOTICE
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
System warning
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is
activated because of ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) signal, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
OKH055042N OKH053040N
■ Type A
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 34
Driving your vehicle
5
5-35
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position, this indicates that
the EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few min-
utes. The warning light will go off
and the EPB switch will operate
normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have the
system checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back up.
If the EPB warning does not go off,
have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH053034N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 35
5-36
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
✽ NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
If you notice a continuous noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, take your vehicle to an authorized
K900 Kia dealer by loading the vehi-
cle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
Electric Parking Brake
Do not operate the electric park-
ing brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. Applying the electric
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the electric parking brake to
stop the vehicle, use great cau-
tion in applying the brake.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 36
Driving your vehicle
5
5-37
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driv-
er brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
Set up
1.Depress the brake pedal and then
press the Auto Hold button. The
white AUTO HOLD indicator will
come on and the system will be in
the standby position.
The driver's door, engine hood and
trunk closed and the driver's seat
belt must be fastened before EPB
will work.
OKH053035N
OKH053036N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 37
5-38
Driving your vehicle
2.When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from white to green.
3.The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or M (Manual) mode, the Auto
Hold will be released automatically
and the vehicle will start to move.
The indicator changes from green to
white.
When driving off from Auto Hold by
depressing the accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator pedal
for a smooth launch.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
OKH053037N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 38
Driving your vehicle
5
5-39
✽ NOTICE
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is
opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB in
such cases:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is
opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a
steep slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Take your
vehicle to an authorized K900 Kia
dealer and have the system
checked.
• While operating Auto Hold, you
may hear mechanical noise.
However, it is normal operating
noise.
If there is a malfunction with the dri-
ver’s door, engine hood or trunk
open detection system, the Auto
Hold may not work properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
K900 Kia dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, do not activate Auto Hold
while driving downhill, backing
up or parking your vehicle.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 39
5-40
Driving your vehicle
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, the notice will illuminate on the
LCD display. Also, warning chime
sounds once.
If it is impossible to apply EPB from
Auto Hold, the notice will illuminate
on the LCD display. Also, warning
chime sounds once. In that time,
apply the brake pedal.
✽ NOTICE
If the above message illuminates on
the LCD display, the Auto Hold and
EPB may not operate. Apply the
brake pedal to stabilize the vehicle.
If you did not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch,
the notice will illuminate on the LCD
display. Also, warning chime sounds
once.
OKH055042N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH053040N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH053041N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 40
Driving your vehicle
5
5-41
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver door, engine
hood and trunk are not closed or the
driver seat belt is not fastened, the
notice will illuminate on the LCD dis-
play. Also warning chime sounds
once. In that time, press the [AUTO
HOLD] button after closing the driver
door, engine hood and trunk and fas-
tening the seat belt.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds in the following cir-
cumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains
installed
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
OKH053046N
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 41
5-42
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
Engine Start/Stop button is ON.
During that time, the ABS will go
through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS but your reg-
ular brakes will work normally.
Contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road with
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operated your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
is normal. Otherwise, you may
have a problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
WKH-014
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 42
Driving your vehicle
5
5-43
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
tain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors includ-
ing speed, road conditions and driv-
er steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in pre-
venting a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
OKH053043N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 43
5-44
Driving your vehicle
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the
ON position, ESC and
ESC OFF indicator lights
illuminate for approxi-
mately 3 seconds, then
ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after placing the
Engine Start/Stop button
to the ON position to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indi-
cator will illuminate). To
turn the ESC on, press
the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light
will go off).
• When starting the
engine, you may hear a
slight ticking sound. This
is the ESC performing an
automatic system self-
check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel
a slight pulsation in the
vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control
and indicates nothing
unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
engine rpm (revolutions
per minute) to increase.
-
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 9:59 AM Page 44
Driving your vehicle
5
5-45
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of
ESC off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains
off. Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will auto-
matically turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
OKH055048NOKH053047N
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 45
5-46
Driving your vehicle
Indicator light
When the Engine Start/Stop button
is press ON, the indicator light illumi-
nates, then goes off if ESC system is
operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC
turned on for daily driving whenev-
er possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
Electronic stability control
Drive carefully even though your
vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control. It can only assist you in
maintaining control under cer-
tain circumstances.
WARNING
Operating ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while
ESC is operating, the vehicle
may go out of control.
WARNING
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 46
Driving your vehicle
5
5-47
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort
function. The main intent is to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards while driving uphill on an
inclined surface. HAC holds the brak-
ing pressure builtup by driver during
stopping procedure for 2 seconds
after releasing brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the
accelerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as
soon as the system detects the dri-
ver’s intention to drive off.
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the park-
ing brake indicator light is out
before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized K900 Kia dealer for
assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
Maintaining Brake
Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped
on an incline. While stopped,
make sure you maintain brake
pressure sufficient to prevent
your vehicle from rolling back-
ward and causing an accident.
Don’t release the brake pedal
until you are ready to accelerate
forward.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 47
5-48
Driving your vehicle
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P
(Park). If your vehicle is facing
downhill, turn the front wheels into
the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away
from the curb to help keep the vehi-
cle from rolling. If there is no curb
or if it is required by other condi-
tions to keep the vehicle from
rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk that the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only tem-
porarily while you put the shift lever
in P (Park) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on an
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transaxle to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 48
Driving your vehicle
5
5-49
The Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) helps avoid accidents
by identifying critical situations early
and warning the driver.
Take the following precautions when
using the Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supplemental
system and it is not intended to,
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sensors
are limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering.
• Always drive cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situations
from occurring. AEB does not stop
the vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
• AEB operates according to the dis-
tance from the vehicle ahead, rela-
tive velocity, and driver's operation
of the brake or accelerator pedal.
Do not drive dangerously to inten-
tionally operate the AEB.
• ALWAYS check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead. The
AEB is not a substitute for safe
driving practices.
AEB Operation
Warning message
AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH055049N
OKH055140N
OKH055141N
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 49
5-50
Driving your vehicle
A warning message and chime will
sound when you need to use the
brake pedal or steering wheel due to
a sudden stop or lack of distance
with the vehicle ahead. The warning
messages will vary according to the
severity of the situation. Immediately
reduce your speed to prevent a colli-
sion.
Brake operation
In a critical situation:
• The brake assist system enters
standby mode to react promptly
when the driver operates the brake
pedal.
• The vehicle automatically reduces
speed according to the severity of
the situation.
- Rapidly reduces speed when
vehicle speed is under 50 mph
(80 km/h)
- Slowly reduces speed when
vehicle speed is over 50 mph
(80 km/h)
• If the driver uses the brake pedal to
reduce vehicle speed, the brake
assist system operates to increase
braking efficiency.
• If the driver presses down hard on
the accelerator pedal or sharply
turns the steering wheel, the brake
assist system is canceled.
Seat belt operation
The driver's and passenger's seat
belt may tighten if the system detects
that a vehicle or object is close.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 50
Driving your vehicle
5
5-51
✽ NOTICE
• If the AEB is canceled from the
User Settings Mode or there is a
problem with the AEB system, the
Automatic Emergency Mode will
not work.
• If the ESC is off or there is a prob-
lem with the ESC system, the
Automatic Emergency Mode will
not work.
• The ESC must be on for the
Automatic Emergency Mode to
control ESC in collision situations.
To cancel the AEB
• Go to the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) and undo the
check for AEB (Autonomous
Emergency Braking) on the LCD
display (For more details refer to
"LCD Display" in chapter 4.). The
warning operation and automatic
braking operation will not function.
• To turn on the AEB, select AEB
(Autonomous Emergency Braking)
from the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) on the LCD display.
The warning operation and auto-
matic braking operation will func-
tion.
✽ NOTICE
When the engine is started, AEB is
automatically turned on. If the sys-
tem is not needed, turn the AEB sys-
tem off from the User Settings Mode
on the LCD display.
✽ NOTICE
If the AEB is selected and the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) is
turned off, the AEB system is auto-
matically canceled.
OKH045528N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 51
5-52
Driving your vehicle
Warning light and message
• When the AEB system is turned
off, the AEB warning light turns on.
(Warning message does not come
on.)
• If the sensor or cover is dirty or
obscured with foreign matter such
as snow, the AEB warning light
and message comes on. In this
case, the AEB system may not
function temporarily, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the AEB
system. Clean the sensor or cover
by using a soft cloth.
• If there is a malfunction with the
AEB system, the AEB warning light
and message will come on. Have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
• When the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) indicator or SCC (Smart
Cruise Control) message comes
on the AEB warning message may
come on but it does not indicate a
malfunction of the AEB system.
✽ NOTICE
Do not damage the sensor or sensor
area by a strong impact. If the sen-
sor moves slightly off position, the
AEB will not operate correctly.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
OKH045518N
■ Warning light
•
•
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
•
•
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
•
•
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
•
•
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
■ Warning message
OKH055151N/OKH055152N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 52
• Even if there is a malfunction to the
brake operation of the AEB, when
you depress the brake pedal, the
brake operates normally. AEB
brake operation does not operate
in certain hazardous situations.
• The AEB is designed to function
above approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) and below approximately
110 mph (180 km/h).
• The AEB does not detect:
- Persons or animals.
- Oncoming vehicles in the oppo-
site lane or a vehicle in an inter-
section.
- Stopped objects.
• The AEB cannot detect objects,
when:
- The sensors are covered with
dirt.
- There is heavy rain or heavy
snow.
- There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves.
- There are strong radar reflec-
tions.
- Driving in a curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
- An object ahead is very narrow
such as motorcycles or bicycles.
- A vehicle suddenly enters your
lane.
- The camera cannot secure a
clear view.
- The camera cannot catch the
whole vehicle.
- An unusual shape vehicle is
ahead such as a trailer, special
access vehicle or a truck with
unique shaped cargo.
- Driving at night, the tail lamp of
the vehicle ahead is missing,
installed on an unusual place or
installed unevenly.
- Coming in or out a tunnel, where
the illumination intensity is high.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-53
Autonomous Emergency
Braking ("AEB")
Limitations
The AEB system is a supple-
mental system and is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead to ensure it is safety
to use the AEB system.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 53
5-54
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE MODE / SNOW MODE
The driver can personalize the
DRIVE MODE based on vehicle con-
trol preference and driving style.
Below is a list of the message which
will appear on the upper AVN screen.
• NORMAL MODE:
Drive mode for smooth and high ride
quality.
• ECO (ACTIVE ECO) MODE:
Drive mode optimized for economic
driving.
• SPORT MODE:
Drive mode for more engaging driv-
ing experience.
• SMART MODE:
Depending on the driver's driving
style (Economic ↔ Aggressive), drive
mode will automatically change
among ECO ↔ NORMAL ↔ SPORT.
• SNOW MODE:
DRIVE MODE optimized for slippery
road surfaces.
Below is a diagram of mode changes
when pressing the DRIVE MODE
button.
❈When selecting the NORMAL
MODE , nothing will show up on
the dash-board
• If you select the SNOW MODE, the
SNOW MODE will operate regardless
of previously selected mode (NOR-
MAL / ECO / SPORT / SMART).
Press the SNOW MODE button one
more time to return back to the previ-
ously selected DRIVE MODE (NOR-
MAL / ECO / SPORT / SMART).
• If you turn off the engine of the
vehicle in any of the NORMAL /
ECO / SMART MODE, and restart
the engine, DRIVE MODE will be
memorized and returned to the last
selected DRIVE MODE. (With
exception of SPORT MODE. If the
engine is turned off in SPORT
MODE, DRIVE MODE will be reset
to NORMAL MODE).
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
OKH053052N
OKH053053N
OKH053103N
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
NORMAL
SMART
ECO
SPORT
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 54
Driving your vehicle
5
5-55
ECO (ACTIVE ECO) MODE
• ACTIVE ECO system
enhances fuel efficiency
through eco control of
the engine and trans-
mission. The actual fuel
efficiency will depend on
personal driving style
and habits.
• By pressing the DRIVE
MODE button and
selecting ECO MODE,
green ECO indicator
light will illuminate.
ECO MODE Driving:
The vehicle engine and transmission
will operate in fuel economy oriented
mode.
ACTIVE ECO MODE system will
restrain fuel economy worsening
driving habits, such as sudden starts
and accelerations, compared to the
NORMAL MODE.
Conditions that limit Active
ECO MODE:
Below are a list of conditions in which
when in ACTIVE ECO MODE, the
indicator light will not change, but the
internal system may operate differ-
ently.
• When engine coolant temperature
is low:
When temperature of the transaxle
oil is below the normal range, the
ACTIVE ECO MODE may become
temporarily unavailable until the
transaxle oil heats up after vehicle
ignition.
• When in an uphill gradient:
Since the ACTIVE ECO MODE
partially limits the engine torque,
ACTIVE ECO MODE may become
temporarily unavailable when more
torque is essential for going uphill.
• When using the manual transmis-
sion operation mode:
If transmission operation is
changed from automatic to manual,
vehicle will reflect it and automati-
cally stop the ACTIVE ECO MODE.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 55
5-56
Driving your vehicle
SPORT MODE
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the SPORT MODE is
selected, the SPORT
indicator (red) will illumi-
nate on the dashboard.
• When the SPORT MODE
is activated, and the
Engine Start/Stop button
is turned off and on again,
drive mode will reset to
NORMAL MODE.
To turn on SPORT
MODE, press DRIVE
MODE button again.
• If the system is activated:
- After increasing speed
and turning your foot off
the accelerator pedal, it
maintains the current
gear and RPM for
some time even though
the accelerator pedal is
not depressed.
- Up-shift during accel-
eration is delayed.
✽ NOTICE
In SPORT DRIVE MODE, the fuel
efficiency may decrease.
SNOW MODE (if equipped)
• SNOW MODE helps the
driver drive more effec-
tively on slippery road
surfaces in snowy or
muddy conditions.
• If the SNOW MODE but-
ton is pressed, the
SNOW MODE will oper-
ate regardless of
whichever drive mode
(NORMAL/ ECO /
SPORT / SMART) the
vehicle is in.
If the SNOW MODE but-
ton is pressed once
more, the DRIVE MODE
(NORMAL / ECO /
SPORT / SMART) will
return to the previously
selected mode.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 56
Driving your vehicle
5
5-57
SMART MODE
• SMART MODE is an intelligent
driving mode which automatically
selects the most appropriate drive
mode (Economic ↔ Aggressive)
by measuring usage of steering
wheel, and accelerator pedal.
• When DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the SMART MODE is
selected, SMART indicator will illu-
minate on the dashboard.
• The color of the SMART MODE
indicator light will depend on the
driving style. If the driving style is
economic, average, and speedy,
the indicator light will be green,
white, and red in respective order.
• When the SMART MODE is acti-
vated, and the Engine Start/Stop
button is turned off and on again,
your car will still maintain the
SMART MODE.
Driving style
SMART
DRIVE MODE
Gear Shift
Pattern
Engine Torque Ride Quality
Economic
SMART
ECO
Fuel Efficient Fuel Efficient
Smooth
Average
SMART
NORMAL
Average Average
Aggressive
SMART
SPORT
Acceleration
Highly
Responsive
Hard
• Below is a summary of the automatic drive mode control depending on the
usage of the steering wheel, engine and transaxle system.
• SMART MODE an intelligent driving mode and when the driving style is
economic and fuel efficient, the SMART ECO MODE will be automatically
selected. The engine and transaxle system will become more fuel efficient,
but the actual fuel economy will depend on various driving factors (on
uphill/ downhill, heavy revving or braking).
• If you make sudden accelerations or turns in SMART MODE, the intelligent
mode will select SMART SPORT MODE. This may decrease fuel efficien-
cy.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 57
5-58
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE MODE Indicator Screen
The DRIVE MODE indicator screen
can be displayed by using the trip com-
puter button on the steering wheel.
DRIVE MODE indicator screen dis-
plays status of current drive mode.
• DRIVE MODE button is located on
the lower part of the transmission
lever for selecting drive mode.
If drive mode is selected manually
by the user, the drive mode indica-
tor screen will show user-selected
drive mode. (NORMAL, ECO, or
SPORT)
If SMART MODE is selected by
DRIVE MODE button, the drive
mode indicator screen will show
current drive mode automatically
selected by SMART MODE sys-
tem. (SMART NORMAL, SMART
ECO, or SMART SPORT)
• When the trip computer mode is
selected to show DRIVE MODE
and the SMART MODE is in oper-
ation, an automatically selected
driving mode SMART ECO,
SMART NORMAL, or SMART
SPORT, will be selected on the
cluster's center.
And right below is the horizontal
driving style gauge which reflects
the driving style in real time.
• If you drive carefully and slowly in
SMART MODE, the left side of the
driving style gauge will illuminate,
and be automatically shifted to the
SMART ECO MODE.
When the driver accelerates more
frequently, the right side of the driv-
ing style gauge will fill up, and shift
to SMART NORMAL MODE.
In addition, if the rate of accelera-
tion and speed is high, drive mode
will change to SMART SPORT
MODE.
• If the auto cruise control function is
operated or the transmission is
shifted to manual mode while
SMART MODE is on, the SMART
MODE will stop temporarily, and
the DRIVE MODE will be displayed
as OFF. The driving style gauge
light will be turned off accordingly.
• If the trip computer is not set to
show DRIVE MODE indicator
screen, and you want to know the
on/off status of the SMART MODE,
simply check whether the letters
'SMART' is lighten up on the
screen or not (green - ECO MODE,
white - NORMAL MODE, red -
SPORT MODE).
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 58
Driving your vehicle
5
5-59
Driving Style Gauge
Once the SMART MODE is selected
by pressing the DRIVE MODE but-
ton, and the DRIVE MODE indicator
screen is selected by pressing the
trip computer button on the steering
wheel, the driving style gauge bar
will show up at the bottom of screen
and visualize current style of driving.
• Left poles of the driving style gauge
indicates degree of economic and
gentle driving in green color. The
more economic and gentle you
drive, the more left poles will light up
in green.
Likewise, the right pole of the driving
style gauge indicates degree of
aggressive and sporty driving in red
color. The faster and more aggres-
sive you drive, the more far right
poles will light up in red.
• When driving style gauge fills up
toward left side (or Economic side)
and kept for certain time, then your
vehicle will be automatically switch
to SMART ECO MODE.
Likewise, when driving style gauge
fills up toward right side (or
Aggressive side) and kept for certain
time, then your vehicle will be auto-
matically the switch to SMART
SPORT MODE.
• If you wish to maintain the SMART
ECO MODE for better fuel econo-
my, try to maintain economic driv-
ing style and keep the driving style
gauge green.
OKH055146N
OKH055147N
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 59
5-60
Driving your vehicle
Attributes of SMART MODE.
• If the accelerator pedal is pressed
gently, your vehicle will recognize it
as a economic driving style. After
some time, the system will automat-
ically shift to SMART ECO MODE.
• If you press the accelerator pedal
frequently and heavily in SMART
ECO MODE, the system will auto-
matically shift to SMART NORMAL
MODE.
• Even when driving style has not
changed from SMART ECO
MODE, if your vehicle is driven
uphill considerably, the system will
detect the gradient. Then, the
SMART system will automatically
change the setting to the SMART
NORMAL MODE temporarily.
Once your vehicle is out of the hilly
ground, your vehicle will automati-
cally return to the SMART ECO
MODE.
• The SMART system will recognize
sudden and repetitive acceleration
or steering as aggressive driving,
and automatically switches into the
SMART SPORT MODE.
Your vehicle will run at a lower gear
in SMART SPORT MODE com-
pared to those in SMART NOR-
MAL MODE.
The vehicle's start and stop
response rate will become faster.
To enter into SMART SPORT
MODE, accelerator pedal may be
pressed deeper than pedal detent
point.
• When the SMART SPORT MODE
is activated, and you take your feet
off the accelerator pedal, the vehi-
cle will remain in low gear and you
may sense engine brake. This is
due to necessary preparatory time
for the next acceleration and is
only normal.
• The SMART SPORT MODE is acti-
vated only when very aggressive
and high speed is detected.
Therefore, in average driving
styles, the SMART system will
select either SMART ECO or
SMART NORMAL MODE.
• The artificial intelligence algorithm
will instantly calculate each driver's
style of driving. So if the driver is
changed to a different person, the
algorithm will measure accordingly.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 60
Driving your vehicle
5
5-61
Conditions which Limit SMART
MODE
In following conditions your vehicle will
temporarily stop the SMART Mode
and the indicator light will turn off.
• When using the manual transmis-
sion operation mode: If the
transaxle system is changed from
automatic to manual, your vehicle
will automatically stop the SMART
MODE.
If transmission operation is
changed from automatic to manu-
al, vehicle will reflect it and auto-
matically stop the SMART MODE.
• When the Cruise Control system is
turned on:
When the driver sets a target
cruise control speed, your vehicle
will automatically stop the SMART
MODE. (The SMART MODE will
not stop immediately after you
press the cruise control button, but
when the cruise control system
takes control of the vehicle speed.)
• If the temperature of the transaxle
oil is very high or low:
The SMART MODE control system
will operate in nearly all driving
conditions. But when the tempera-
ture of the transaxle oil is out of the
normal range, the SMART MODE
system may become temporarily
unavailable.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 61
5-62
Driving your vehicle
1. Cruise indicator
2. Set speed
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on acciden-
tally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or steep hills
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽ NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
Pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button to the ON position or start-
ing the engine. This is to check if
the brake switch which is impor-
tant part to cancel cruise control is
in normal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH055142N
Misuse of Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
WARNING
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 62
Driving your vehicle
5
5-63
Cruise control switch
CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
CANCEL : Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1.Move the lever up (to CRUISE), to
turn the system on. The CRUISE
indicator light will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
3.Lever must be moved down (to
SET-) prior to setting any desired
speed. The Set speed in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OKH053119N OKH053058N
OKH053059N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 63
5-64
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2.0 km/h or
1 mph each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h or
1 mph each time you move the
lever down (to SET-) in this man-
ner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
OKH053060N OKH053059N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 64
Driving your vehicle
5
5-65
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Move the lever to CANCEL located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).
• Increasing the vehicle speed to
more than approximately 125 mph
(200 km/h).
• The ESC is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with
manual mode.
• Operating the EPB switch. Do not
operate the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency sit-
uation.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the Set
speed in the instrument cluster will
go off), but it will not turn the system
off. If you wish to resume cruise con-
trol operation, move up the lever (to
RES+) located on your steering
wheel. You will return to your previ-
ously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 20
mph (30 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE lever was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
OKH053061N
OKH053060N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 65
5-66
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Move the lever up (to CRUISE).
(the CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off)
• Turn the Engine Start / Stop Button
off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
OKH053058N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 66
Driving your vehicle
5
5-67
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ Set speed
➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The ASCC allows you to program the
vehicle to maintain a set speed so
long as it is not limited by traffic.
When traffic is encountered the vehi-
cle will slow down to maintain a set
distance behind traffic without
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal.
• Use the ASCC only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
• Limited visibility (rain, snow, smog,
etc)
• Cruise function should not be used
when the vehicle is being towed to
prevent any damage.
ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (ASCC) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH055063N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Advanced Smart Cruise
Control inadvertent acti-
vation.
If the ASCC is left on, (CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminated) the ASCC
can be activated unintentional-
ly. Keep the ASCC off (CRUISE
indicator light OFF) when the
ASCC is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed
which can increase the risk of
accidents.
WARNING
Advanced Smart Cruise
Control Limitations
• The advanced smart cruise
control is a supplemental sys-
tem and is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
• Do not use the advanced
smart cruise control when it
may not be safe to keep the
car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or steep hills
up-hill or down-hill roads.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 67
5-68
Driving your vehicle
Speed setting (ASCC)
To set cruise control speed:
1.Move the lever up (to CRUISE), to
turn the system on. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
• 20 mph (30 km/h) ~ 110 mph
(180 km/h) : when there is no
vehicle in front
• 0 mph (0 km/h) ~ 110 mph (180
km/h) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3.Lever must be moved down (to
SET-) prior to setting any desired
speed. The set speed and vehicle
to vehicle distance on the LCD
screen will illuminate.
4.Release the accelerator pedal. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
• ASCC will operate to a maximum
setting of 110 mph (180 km/h).
However all local speed limit laws
must be followed.
OKH053058N
OKH053059N
OKH053060N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 68
Driving your vehicle
5
5-69
To decrease the crusie control
set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever down (to SET-) in this man-
ner.
• You can set the cruise control to any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not
regulated automatically at this time
even if there is a vehicle in front of
you.
ASCC will be temporarily can-
celed when:
Cancelled manually
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• Move down the lever (to CANCEL)
located on the steering wheel.
The ASCC turns off temporarily
when the indicator on the LCD dis-
play turns off.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
OKH053059N OKH053061N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 69
5-70
Driving your vehicle
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• The EPB (electronic parking brake)
is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h)
• The vehicle stops on a steep
incline.
• The ESC, TCS or ABS is operat-
ing.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• When the vehicle is stopped for
over 5 minutes.
• The vehicle stops and go repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the lever up (RES +) or down (SET
-), approximately 3 seconds after
the vehicle is stopped by the Smart
Cruise Control System with no
other vehicle ahead.
• The driver starts driving by
depressing the accelerator pedal
or move up the lever (to RES+) or
down(to SET-) if a vehicle stops far
away ahead of the your vehicle.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than 1
minute.
Each of these actions will cancel
the ASCC operation. (the set
speed and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance on the LCD display will go
off.)
In a condition where the ASCC is
cancelled automatically, the ASCC
will not resume even though the
RES+ or SET- lever is moved. Also,
the EPB (electronic parking brake)
will be applied when the vehicle is
stopped.
✽ NOTICE
If the ASCC is cancelled by other
than the reasons mentioned, have the
system checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
If the system is cancelled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
OKH055068N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 70
Driving your vehicle
5
5-71
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the
CRUISE lever was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
move the lever up/down (to RES+ or
SET-).
If you move the lever up (to RES+),
the speed will resume to the recently
set speed. It will not resume if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
To turn cruise control off:
Move the lever up (to CRUISE). (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
OKH053060N
OKH053058N
Cruise Control Reactivation
To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, always check the road
conditions when reactivating
the smart cruise control using
the RES+ lever to ensure the
road conditions permit safe use
of the cruise control.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 71
5-72
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle to vehicle distance
setting (ASCC)
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program
the vehicle to maintain relative dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead without
depressing the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will
automatically activate when the
ASCC is on.
Select the appropriate distance
according to road conditions and
vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance is maintained
as follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
(52.5 m)
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
✽ NOTICE
The 'Distance 4' is always set when
the system is used for the first time
after starting the engine.
OKH053069N
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
Following Distance
• To avoid collisions, always be
aware of the selected speed
and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance settings when activat-
ing your smart cruise control
system.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:00 AM Page 72
Driving your vehicle
5
5-73
• The warning chime sounds and
malfunction indicator blinks if it is
hard to maintain the selected dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
• Even if the warning chime is not
activated, always pay attention to
the driving conditions to prevent
dangerous situations from occur-
ring.
■ Type A ■ Type B
Distance 4
Distance 2 Distance 1
Distance 3
Distance 4
Distance 3
Distance 2 Distance 1
• The vehicle will maintain the set speed, when the lane ahead is clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or speed up within selected speed to maintain
the selected distance, when there is a vehicle ahead of you in the lane. (A
vehicle will appear in front of your vehicle in the LCD display only when
there is an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising
speed after accelerating to the selected speed.
OKH055070N/OKH055071N
OKH055148N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 73
5-74
Driving your vehicle
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed:
less than 20 mph(30km/h)) moves to
the next lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will appear.
If a vehicle enters into your lane
moving less than the designated
speed, you can adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the brake
pedal.
In traffic situation
• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts
moving, your vehicle will start as
well. However, if the vehicle stops
for more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
move the lever (to RES+ or SET-)
to start driving.
• If you push the advanced smart
cruise control lever (RES+ or SET-
) while Auto Hold and advanced
smart cruise control is operating
(The green AUTO HOLD indicator),
Auto Hold will be released regard-
less of accelerator pedal operation
and the vehicle will start to move.
Sensor to detect distance to the
vehicle ahead
The sensor detects distance to the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
OKH053072N
OKH055073N
OKH055074N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 74
Driving your vehicle
5
5-75
Sensor warning message
If the sensor or cover is dirty
or obscured with foreign
matter such as snow, this
message will appear and
indicator light illuminate. In
this case, the system may
not function temporarily, but
it does not indicate a mal-
function of the Smart Cruise
Control System. Clean the
sensor or cover by using a
soft cloth.
SCC (Smart Cruise Control)
malfunction message
The message will appear
and indicator light illuminate
when the vehicle to vehicle
distance control system is
not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized K900 Kia dealer
and have the system
checked.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• Use only a genuine Kia sensor
cover for your vehicle.
• Do not install accessories
around the sensor and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
sensor performance.
• To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
• Do not damage the sensor or
sensor area by a strong
impact. If the sensor moves
slightly off position, the ASCC
will not operate correctly.
If this occurs, have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION
OKH045511N
OKH045517N
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 75
5-76
Driving your vehicle
To convert to cruise control
mode:
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
1.Turn the ASCC on (the cruise indi-
cator light will be on but the system
will not be activated).
2.Push the distance to distance
switch for more than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between "Smart cruise
control(SCC) mode" and "Cruise
control(CC) mode".
Limitations of the system
The ASCC may have limits to its abil-
ity to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
On curves
• On curves, the ASCC may not
detect a moving vehicle in your
lane, and then your vehicle could
accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will rapidly slow
down when the vehicle ahead is
recognized suddenly.
OKH053200N
OKH055106N
OKH055107N
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
When using the cruise control
mode, you must manually
assess the distance to other
vehicles as the system will not
automatically brake to slow
down for other vehicles.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 76
Driving your vehicle
5
5-77
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent
lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. Apply
the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check
to be sure that the road conditions
permit safe operation of the ASCC.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the ASCC may not detect a moving
vehicle in your lane, and cause
your vehicle to accelerate to the
set speed. Also, the vehicle speed
will rapidly slow down when the
vehicle ahead is recognized sud-
denly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
OKH053202N
OKH053201N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 77
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect imme-
diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is slower than your vehicle,
your speed may decrease to main-
tain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle,
your vehicle will accelerate to the
selected speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
OKH053203N
OKH053204N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 78
Driving your vehicle
5
5-79
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane
cannot be recognized by the sensor
as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile
such as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the
lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or
on curves
Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
OKH053205N
OKH053206N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 79
5-80
Driving your vehicle
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out to the
back of the vehicle.
OKH053207N OKH053208N
Emergency Stops
• The ASCC cannot guarantee
the stop for every emergency
situation. If an emergency
stop is necessary, you must
apply the brakes.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 80
Driving your vehicle
5
5-81
When other vehicles are changing
lanes in front of you frequently, the
ASCC may not detect the vehicle
at certain times. Always look ahead
cautiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from occur-
ring.
✽ NOTICE
The ASCC may not operate tem-
porarily due to electrical interfer-
ence.
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules").
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
ASCC Following Distance
• To avoid collisions, always be
aware of the selected speed
and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance settings when activat-
ing your smart cruise control
system.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 81
5-82
Driving your vehicle
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
ver's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
• If the sensor cannot detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 38 mph (60 km/h), the
LDWS will not be able to notify you
if the vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS sen-
sor from water or any liquid.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and do not damage the sensor by
a strong impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• Always check the road conditions
because you may not hear the
warning chime because of audio
and external conditions.
• The operation of the LDWS can be
affected by several factors (includ-
ing environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in it's lane at
all times.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH053075N
OKH053076N
LDWS Alert
The LDWS is only intended to
provide you with information
regarding your vehicle's posi-
tion on the roadway. Upon
receiving an LDWS alert, you
must take the necessary steps
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle. The LDWS does not provide
any steering inputs into the
vehicle for you. It can be dan-
gerous to make a large sudden
steering input in response to an
alert, since that could result in
loss of control.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 82
Driving your vehicle
5
5-83
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator
(green) illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, press the button
again.
If the system detects that your vehi-
cle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 38 mph (60 km/h),
the warning operates as follows:
1.Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low.
2.Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
OKH053078N
OKH053079N
■ When the sensor detects the lane line
■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
OKH053080N
OKH053081N
■ Lane departure warning (Type A)
■ Lane departure warning (Type B)
OKH053108N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 83
The color of symbol will change
depend on the condition of LDWS
system.
- White color : It means the sensor
does not detect the
lane line.
- Green color : It means the sensor
detects the lane line.
Warning indicator
When the LDWS is not working prop-
erly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
K900 Kia dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lane.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽ NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn sig-
nal switch then change the lane.
5-84
Driving your vehicle
OKH053108N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH045510N
■ Type A ■ Type B
LDWS Limitations
The Lane Departure Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
and drive safely.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 84
Driving your vehicle
5
5-85
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if
the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
• The lane can't be visible due to
snow, rain, stain, a puddle or other
environmental conditions.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as tunnel
enter/exit.
• The headlights are off at night or in
a tunnel.
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to a direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the dust.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are
crossing.
• Putting something on the dash-
board.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane line is more than two in
either side (Left/Right)
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 85
5-86
Driving your vehicle
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides an indication to
the driver if it detects an object
approaching from these areas.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 6 mph (10
km/h) faster than the other vehicle,
the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you at
high speed, the system will warn
you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rear-
ward, and the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle in the left or
right side, the system will warn
you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI053129L
BSD Limitations
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system. Do not solely rely
on the system but always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 86
Driving your vehicle
5
5-87
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds about 20
mph (30 km/h), the system will acti-
vate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned OFF and ON the system
returns to the previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above about 20
mph (30 km/h)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror and the head up dis-
play.
If the detected vehicle is not in warn-
ing range, the warning will turn off
according to driving conditions.
OKH053082N
OKH055084N
1st stage
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 87
5-88
Driving your vehicle
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror, the head up
display and an alarm will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
- The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
✽ NOTICE
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OKH035020N
OKH035021N
2nd stage
OKH055085N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 88
Driving your vehicle
5
5-89
Warning message
The message will appear to notify
the driver if there are foreign sub-
stances on the rear bumper or it is
hot near the rear bumper. The light
on the switch and the system will
turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign matter on the
rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign matter is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized K900 Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.
The system will turn off automatical-
ly.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH053086N
OKH055087N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 89
5-90
Driving your vehicle
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-
tem off.
• If the vehicle is turned off and on
again, the RCTA system will return
to the state right before the vehicle
was turned off. Always turn the
RCTA system off when not in use.
• The system is operated when the
vehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10
km/h) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 1.6 feet
(0.5m) ~ 65 feet (20m) based on
side direction. If the approaching
vehicle speed is 2.5 mph (4
km/h)~22 mph (36 km/h) in sens-
ing range, it is detected. However,
the system sensing range is differ-
ent base on conditions. Always pay
attention to surrounding.
OVI053131 OKH045576N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:01 AM Page 90
Driving your vehicle
5
5-91
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by the sen-
sors approaches your vehicle, the
warning chime will sound, the
warning light on the outside
rearview mirror will blink and a
message will appear on the LCD
display.
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range of your vehicle,
move the vehicle away from the
detected object slowly; the warning
will be cancelled.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
❈ If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be reduced.
OKH053209N
OKH053213N
The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving. Always drive safely and
use caution when changing
lanes or backing the vehicles
up. The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) may not detect
every object alongside the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 91
5-92
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The system may not work proper-
ly if the bumper has been replaced
or if repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs accord-
ing to the roads width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• In addition, if the road is very
wide the system may not detect
other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not detect other vehicles or objects in
certain circumstances.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or
the sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle is altered
such as when the trunk is loaded
with heavy objects, or there is low
tire pressure etc.
- Bad weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, tunnel, human and ani-
mal etc.
- Metal substances are near the
vehicles such as in a construction
area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer like vehicle is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to it
and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep,
uneven road.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 92
Driving your vehicle
5
5-93
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is very high or low.
- When the sensors are covered by
the vehicle, wall or a pillar of park-
ing lot.
- When your vehicle is backing up, if
the detected vehicle approaches
your vehicle or also backs up.
- Small objects like shopping carts
and baby carriages.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to anoth-
er vehicle.
- When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from my
vehicle OR when the vehicle two
lanes away moves to the next lane
from my vehicle.
- When exiting rearward from a
parking space with pillars or metal
structures.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many plants.
- When driving on wet surface.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is damaged or covered with
debris.
- The window is covered with debris.
- The windows are severely tinted.
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules").
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 93
5-94
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
help reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on brake com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 94
Driving your vehicle
5
5-95
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is reduced by cross-
winds and headwinds. To help off-
set some of this loss, slow down
when driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized K900 Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the Engine while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 95
5-96
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
WARNING
Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 96
Driving your vehicle
5
5-97
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
OKH053210N OKH053211N
Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage.
CAUTION
Sudden vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 97
5-98
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
OKH053093N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 98
Driving your vehicle
5
5-99
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further informa-
tion and tread limits, refer to
"Tires and wheels" in section 7.
WARNING
Under/Over Inflated Tires
Always check the tires for prop-
er inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 99
5-100
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires. If
snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid
acceleration, sudden brake applica-
tions, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids. You need to
keep sufficient distance between the
vehicle in operation in front and your
vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tire will provide greater
driving force, but will not prevent side
skids.
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before installing tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires. You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 100
Driving your vehicle
5
5-101
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain).
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper snow chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturers
warranty.
Install the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) only on the rear tires.
✽ NOTICE
Always check the AutoSock
®
(fabric
snow chain) installation for proper
mounting after driving approximate-
ly 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to
ensure safe mounting. Retighten or
remount the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) if they are loose.
❈AutoSock
®
is a Registered trade-
mark of AutoSock
®
.
Chain installation
When installing the AutoSock
®
(fab-
ric snow chain), follow the manufac-
turer's instructions and mount them
as tightly as you can. Drive slowly
with the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) installed. If you hear the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain) con-
tacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make con-
tact, slow down until it stops.
Remove the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
When mounting the AutoSock
®
(fab-
ric snow chain), park the vehicle on
level ground away from traffic. Turn
on the vehicle Hazard Warning flash-
ers and place a triangular emer-
gency warning device behind the
vehicle if available. Always place the
vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking
brake and turn off the engine before
installing the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain).
OKH055098N
Make sure the AutoSock
®
(fabric
snow chain) are the correct size
and type for your tires. Incorrect
snow chains can cause damage
to the vehicle body and suspen-
sion and may not be covered by
your vehicle manufacturer war-
ranty.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 101
5-102
Driving your vehicle
• The use of the AutoSock
®
(fabric
snow chain) may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or
the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain)
manufacturer’s recommended
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road
hazards, which may cause the vehi-
cle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel
braking.
❈AutoSock
®
is a Registered trade-
mark of AutoSock
®
.
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or a
service station.
• The AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain)
any time you hear them hitting
the vehicle.
CAUTION
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 102
Driving your vehicle
5
5-103
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized K900 Kia dealer and most
auto parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint fin-
ish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the shift lever in P (Park) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 103
5-104
Driving your vehicle
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 104
Driving your vehicle
5
5-105
Tire and loading information
label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
904 lbs. (410 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OKH053120N/OKH053121N
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 105
5-106
Driving your vehicle
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit -
1.Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.
and there will be five 150 lbs. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 106
Driving your vehicle
5
5-107
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
805 lbs
161 lbs (73 kg) × 5
(365 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
44 lbs
Luggage weight (20 kg)
ABC
Example 3
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
99 lbs
Luggage weight (45 kg)
ABC
Example 2
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
549 lbs
Luggage weight (249 kg)
Example 1
ABC
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 107
5-108
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
OEN056020
Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle and vehicle
capacity weight. Exceeding
these ratings can affect your
vehicle’s handling and braking
ability.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 108
Driving your vehicle
5
5-109
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling--all of which may result in
a crash.
WARNING
Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
WARNING
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 109
5-110
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
KH USA 5:2018 4/12/2017 10:02 AM Page 110
What to do in an emergency
Road warning......................................................6-2
• Hazard warning flasher...........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving...............6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing........6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving...........................6-3
• If engine stalls while driving....................................6-3
If the engine will not start ...................................6-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly......6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start.....6-4
Emergency starting.............................................6-5
• Jump starting...........................................................6-5
• Push-starting...........................................................6-8
If the engine overheats.......................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)........6-11
• Low tire pressure telltale.......................................6-13
• Low tire pressure position telltale..........................6-13
• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator...........................................6-14
• Changing a tire with TPMS ...................................6-15
If you have a flat tire.........................................6-17
• Jack and tools .......................................................6-17
• Removing and storing the spare tire.....................6-18
• Changing tires.......................................................6-19
• Jack label ..............................................................6-27
Towing...............................................................6-28
• Towing service.......................................................6-28
• Removable towing hook........................................6-30
• Emergency towing.................................................6-31
6
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 1
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as
a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
Engine Start/Stop button in any posi-
tion. The flasher switch is located in
the center console switch panel. All
turn signal lights will flash simultane-
ously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
6-2
What to do in an emergency
OKH045186N
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 2
What to do in an emergency
6
6-3
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the car slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
apply the brakes immediately or
attempt to pull off the road as this
may cause a loss of control. When
the car has slowed to such a speed
that it is safe to do so, brake care-
fully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and
park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not
park in the median area between
the two traffic lanes.
2.When the car is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers,
set the parking brake and put the
shift lever in P.
3.Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or Kia
Roadside Assistance.
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 3
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check fuel level.
2.With the Engine Start/Stop Button
in the OFF position, check all con-
nectors at ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized K900 Kia dealer or
Kia Roadside Assistance.
6-4
What to do in an emergency
Push/Pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 4
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
✽ NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the
trunk compartment, but when you
jump start your vehicle, use the
jumper terminal in the engine com-
partment.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-5
OKH063024N
12 Volt Push/Pull Start
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-volt
power supply (either two 12-volt
batteries in series or a 24-volt
motor generator set).
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 5
6-6
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
✽ NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the
trunk compartment, but when you
jump start your vehicle, use the
jumper terminal in the engine com-
partment.
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Open the engine hood.
Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
WARNING
Frozen batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
WARNING
Sulfuric acid risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 6
5.Lift the end of strip (5) up.
6.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out.
7.Lift the rear portion of small service
cover (6) up and then remove the
service cover.
(A) : for assemble, (B) : for remove
8.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out from main service cover (7).
9.Pull the main service cover over
0.28 in (7 mm) to toward the front
of the vehicle.
10. Lift the main service cover up
and then remove the main serv-
ice cover. Be careful not to dam-
age the holder under the main
service cover.
11. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the
illustration. First connect one end
of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the jump start con-
nector (1), then connect the
other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of
the other jumper cable to the
negative terminal of the booster
battery (3), then the other end to
the negative terminal of the jump
start connector (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables
to contact anything except the
correct battery terminals or the
correct ground. Do not lean over
the battery when making con-
nections.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-7
OKH073083N OKH073084N
A
B
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 7
6-8
What to do in an emergency
✽ NOTICE
Make sure to connect one end of the
jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the booster battery, and the
other end to a metallic point, far
away from the battery.
12. Start the engine of the vehicle
with the booster battery and let it
run at 2,000 rpm, then start the
engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, have the system
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transmission cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
Tow Starting Vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
WARNING
Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to over-
heat and crack, releasing bat-
tery acid.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 8
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P and set
the parking brake. If the air condi-
tioning is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the car or steam is coming
out from the hood, stop the engine.
Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the
steaming has stopped. If there is
no visible loss of engine coolant
and no steam, leave the engine
running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the car. (If the air condition-
ing had been in use, it is normal for
cold water to be draining from it
when you stop.)
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized
K900 Kia dealer for assistance.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-9
Under the hood
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING
Radiator Cap
Do not remove the
radiator cap when the
engine is hot. This
may result in coolant
being blown out of the
opening and cause
serious burns.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 9
6-10
What to do in an emergency
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized K900 Kia dealer
for assistance.
• Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and this should be checked as
soon as possible by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the engine.
To prevent damage, add engine
coolant slowly in small quanti-
ties.
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 10
What to do in an emergency
6
6-11
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS
Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low Tire Pressure Position Telltale
(shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Information Mode on the clus-
ter.
- Refer to "User Settings Mode" in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-
utes after driving.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings Mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to "User
Settings Mode" in chapter 4).
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
OKH063025N
OKH043415N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043403N
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 11
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
cle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
✽ NOTICE
If any of the below happens, have
the system be checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator does
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to the ON or engine is run-
ning.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
6-12
What to do in an emergency
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 12
What to do in an emergency
6
6-13
Low tire pressure telltale
Low tire pressure position tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The low tire
pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 20
minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25
km/h) after replacing the low pres-
sure tire with the spare tire, the
below will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated because the TPMS sensor is
not mounted on the spare wheel.
✽ NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
• In winter or cold weather, the low
tire pressure telltale may be illumi-
nated if the tire pressure was
adjusted to the recommended tire
inflation pressure in warm weather.
It does not mean your TPMS is
malfunctioning because the
decreased temperature leads to a
proportional lowering of tire pres-
sure.
• When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the
outside temperature is greatly
higher or lower, you should check
the tire inflation pressure and
adjust the tires to the recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure.
• When filling tires with more air,
conditions to turn off the low tire
pressure telltale may not be met.
This is because a tire inflator has a
margin of error in performance.
The low tire pressure telltale will be
turned off if the tire pressure is
above the recommended tire infla-
tion pressure.
OKH043415N
■ Type A ■ Type B
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 13
6-14
What to do in an emergency
• The tire pressure may vary
depending on various factors
including the temperature condi-
tions of parking area, driving condi-
tions and ambient temperature,
altitude above sea level.
• The tire pressure displayed on the
instrument panel may be different
from the tire pressure measured by
a tire pressure gauge.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
✽ NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the low tire pressure position
telltale will not be displayed even
though the vehicle has an under-
inflated tire.
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated if the vehicle is
moving around electric power sup-
ply cables or radio transmitter such
as at police stations, government
and public offices, broadcasting
stations, military installations, air-
ports, or transmitting towers, etc.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated if the snow
chains are used or some separate
electronic devices such as note-
book computer, mobile charger,
remote starter or navigation etc.,
are used in the vehicle. This can
interfere with normal operation of
the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 14
What to do in an emergency
6
6-15
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer as
soon as possible or replace the flat
tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 20
minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25
km/h) after replacing the low pres-
sure tire with the spare tire, the
below will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel.
You may not be able to identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure. Please
note that a tire that is hot (from being
driven) will have a higher pressure
measurement than a tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour
period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Repair Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by K900 Kia
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by K900 Kia deal-
er may damage the tire pres-
sure sensor.
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 15
6-16
What to do in an emergency
✽ NOTICE
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) compo-
nents may void the warranty for that
portion of the vehicle.
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules").
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external factors
such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 16
What to do in an emergency
6
6-17
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
(4) Screw driver
(phillips and flat-head)
(5) Spanner
(6) Tool for removing wheel cap
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
• Always move the vehicle complete-
ly off the road and onto the shoul-
der before trying to change a tire.
The jack should be used on level
firm ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road, call a
towing service company for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehi-
cle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not start or run the engine while
the vehicle is on the jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
are in a secure place away from
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
OKH065005N
Changing tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 17
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
6-18
What to do in an emergency
Tire Jack
• Never use the bumper or
other parts of the vehicle to
support the vehicle jack. The
vehicle can easily roll off the
jack causing serious injury or
death.
• Do not place any portion of
your body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack.
Use vehicle support stands.
WARNING
Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
WARNING
OKH063006N
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 18
What to do in an emergency
6
6-19
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by a hand, you can
loosen it easily using the Jack handle.
1.Put the Jack handle (1) into the
inside of tire hold-down wing bolt.
2.Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise by the Jack han-
dle to utilize the principles of the
lever and fulcrum.
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
3.Activate the hazard warning flasher.
OKH063003N
When you remove or store the
spare tire, do not contact or
bump the battery with the spare
tire. Contacting or bumping the
battery may cause failure of
electrical circuits.
CAUTION
OKH065030N
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 19
6-20
What to do in an emergency
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6.Insert the tool (1) into the hole and
pull out the wheel cap.
OKH065008N OKH065009N
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
WARNING
When removing the wheel cap,
if you use any other tool except
the tool (1), the wheel cap may
be damaged.
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 20
What to do in an emergency
6
6-21
7.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each in
sequence of number, but do not
remove any nut until the tire has
been raised off the ground.
8.Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place the
jack at the designated locations
under the frame. The jacking posi-
tions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to index with the jack.
OKH065010N
OKH063026N
OKH063011N
Place the jack not to damage to
the plastic guard. If you place
the jack at the plastic guard and
jack up the vehicle, the plastic
guard may be damaged.
CAUTION
Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 21
6-22
What to do in an emergency
9.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
10. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away.
To put the wheel on the hub, pick
up the spare tire, line up the
holes with the studs and slide
the wheel onto them. If this is dif-
ficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel
lined up with the top stud. Then
jiggle the wheel back and forth
until the wheel can be slid over
the other studs.
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that prevents the
wheel from fitting solidly against
the hub.
OKH063012N
Installing a wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:21 AM Page 22
What to do in an emergency
6
6-23
11.To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
12.Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized K900 Kia dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
OKH065013N
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 23
6-24
What to do in an emergency
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of compact spare
tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
• You should drive carefully when the
compact spare is in use. The com-
pact spare should be replaced by
the proper conventional tire and rim
at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
Reusing lug nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Wheel studs
Do not drive your vehicle with
damaged wheel studs. If the
studs are damaged, they may
lose their ability to retain the
wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING
Inadequate spare tire
pressure
Check the inflation pressures
as soon as possible after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
it to the specified pressure, if
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” section 8.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 24
What to do in an emergency
6
6-25
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 25
6-26
What to do in an emergency
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the wheel nut torque must
be set correctly to prevent wheel
vibration. The correct wheel nut
tightening torque is 65~79 lb-ft
(9~11 kg.m).
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 26
What to do in an emergency
6
6-27
Jack label
1.Model Name
2.Maximum allowable load
3.When using the jack, set your park-
ing brake.
4.When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5.Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6.The designated locations under
the frame
7.When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8.Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion.
9.The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10.Jack manufacturer
11.Production date
12.Representative company and
address
OHYK064001
OHYK065005
■ Type A
■ Example
■ Type B
OHYK064002
■ Type C
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 27
6-28
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the rear wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
rear wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the rear wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the rear of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the front.
• Ensure any metal parts on the tie-
down straps do not contact painted
surfaces or the face of the wheels.
• Do not place straps over the body
panels or through the wheels.
OKH064014N
A
B
C
dolly
OKH065027N
Attaching straps to the chasis,
suspension or other parts of
the body can cause damage.
CAUTION
Side and curtain air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed. The side and cur-
tain air bag may deploy when
the ignitions is ON, and the
rollover sensor detects the situ-
ation as a rollover.
WARNING
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 28
What to do in an emergency
6
6-29
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1.Set the Engine Start/Stop Button in
the ACC position.
2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
OKH063016N
OKH063015N
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground
as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OKH053104N
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
CAUTION
If the ECS malfunction indicator
illuminates when there is no air
in the suspension, the vehicle
height will be very low, so do not
drive the vehicle to protect it
from projections on the ground.
Take your vehicle to an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer by towing
the vehicle and have the system
checked. You should tow the
vehicle as shown the picture.
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 29
6-30
What to do in an emergency
When you load the vehicle onto the
tow truck, the loading angle(1) should
be smaller than 6°.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1.Open the trunk, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover by pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front or rear bumper.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
OKH053105N
OKH063018N
OKH065019N
■ Front
■ Rear
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 30
What to do in an emergency
6
6-31
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, have it
done by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck
service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
OKH063020N
OKH065021N
■ Front
■ Rear
• Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 31
6-32
What to do in an emergency
• If the disabled vehicle cannot be
moved, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact an authorized
K900 Kia dealer or a commercial
tow truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Use a towing strap less than 16
feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or
red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
✽ NOTICE
Emergency towing is not legal in all
states. Contact an authorized K900
Kia dealer and tow the vehicle.
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transmission is in
neutral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the Engine
Start/Stop Button in the ACC posi-
tion. A driver must be in the towed
vehicle to operate the steering and
brakes.
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and
towing cable or chain. The hook
and towing cable or chain may
break and cause serious injury
or damage.
Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
WARNING
OKH063022N
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 32
What to do in an emergency
6
6-33
Automatic transmission
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transmission,
limit the vehicle speed to 10
mph (15 km/h) and drive less
than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transmission for fluid
leaks under your vehicle. If
the automatic transmission
fluid is leaking, flatbed equip-
ment or a towing dolly must
be used.
CAUTION
KH USA 6:2018 4/12/2017 10:22 AM Page 33
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment ..........................................7-3
Maintenance services.........................................7-5
• Owner’s responsibility .............................................7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions ............................7-6
Owner maintenance............................................7-8
• Owner maintenance schedule ...............................7-8
Scheduled maintenance service.......................7-10
• Normal maintenance schedule .............................7-11
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions........7-27
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items..7-29
Checking fluid levels.........................................7-32
Engine oil..........................................................7-32
• Checking the engine oil level ................................7-32
• Changing the engine oil and filter.........................7-33
Engine coolant..................................................7-34
• Checking the coolant level ....................................7-34
• Changing the coolant............................................7-37
Brake fluid.........................................................7-38
• Checking the brake fluid level ...............................7-38
Power steering fluid ..........................................7-39
• Checking the power steering fluid level.................7-39
• Checking the power steering hose........................7-39
Washer fluid......................................................7-40
• Checking the washer fluid level.............................7-40
Air cleaner.........................................................7-41
• Filter replacement .................................................7-41
Climate control air filter.....................................7-44
• Filter inspection.....................................................7-44
• Filter replacement .................................................7-44
Wiper blades.....................................................7-46
• Blade inspection....................................................7-46
• Blade replacement ................................................7-46
Battery ..............................................................7-49
• For best battery service ........................................7-49
• Battery recharging by battery charger ..................7-52
• Battery recharging by vehicle................................7-52
• Reset items ...........................................................7-53
Tires and wheels...............................................7-54
• Tire care ................................................................7-54
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures..........7-54
• Checking tire inflation pressure.............................7-55
• Tire rotation ...........................................................7-56
• Wheel alignment and tire balance.........................7-57
• Tire replacement ...................................................7-58
• Wheel replacement ...............................................7-59
• Tire traction ...........................................................7-59
• Tire maintenance...................................................7-59
• Tire sidewall labeling.............................................7-60
• Low aspect ratio tire..............................................7-64
7
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:36 PM Page 1
7
• Tire terminology and definitions............................7-65
• All season tires .....................................................7-67
• Summer tires ........................................................7-67
• Snow tires..............................................................7-68
• Tire chains.............................................................7-68
• Radial-ply tires ......................................................7-69
Fuses................................................................7-70
• Instrument panel fuse replacement.......................7-71
• Engine compartment fuse replacement................7-73
• Fuse/relay panel description .................................7-76
Light bulbs ........................................................7-90
• Front light bulb.......................................................7-91
• Side repeater light bulb replacement ...................7-93
• Rear combination light bulb replacement..............7-93
• High mounted stop light........................................7-94
• License plate lamp replacement ...........................7-94
• Interior light bulb replacement...............................7-95
Appearance care ..............................................7-96
• Exterior care..........................................................7-96
• Interior care.........................................................7-102
Emission control system.................................7-104
• Crankcase emission control system....................7-104
• Evaporative emission control (including orvr:
Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system......7-104
• Exhaust emission control system........................7-105
California perchlorate notice...........................7-108
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:36 PM Page 2
Maintenance
7
7-3
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Air cleaner
9. Fuse box
10. Jumper terminal
OKH015008N
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■
3.8L Engine
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 3
7-4
Maintenance
OKH013006N
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jumper terminal
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■ 5.0L Engine
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 4
Maintenance
7
7-5
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
K900 Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized K900 Kia dealer has
factory-trained technicians and gen-
uine Kia parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and qual-
ity service, see an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
An authorized K900 Kia dealer
meets Kia’s high service quality stan-
dards and receives technical support
from Kia in order to provide you with
a high level of service satisfaction.
✽ NOTICE
■ NHTSA Safety Corrosion
Alert
The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) has
issued a general warning to all vehi-
cle owners of all brands regarding
the risks associated with vehicle
underbody corrosion. From your
initial purchase, take the following
steps to prevent unsafe corrosion
damage to your vehicle:
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the win-
ter and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
(Continued)
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 5
7-6
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for
corrosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visual-
ly aware of corrosion flaking or
scaling or if you become aware of
a change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongy brakes, flu-
ids leaking, impairment of direc-
tional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps. NHTSA
further advises that after a vehicle
is 7 years old, it is essential that
you take these indicated mainte-
nance steps to ensure that you pro-
tect yourself from unsafe corro-
sion conditions.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer
with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty &
Maintenance book provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Maintenance work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially
rings, bracelets, watches, and
necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose
clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 6
• Do not put heavy objects or apply
excessive force on top of the
engine cover (if equipped) or fuel
related parts.
• When you inspect the fuel system
(fuel lines and fuel injection
devices), we recommend that you
contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
• Do not drive long time with the
engine cover (if equipped) removed.
• When checking the engine room,
do not go near fire.
• Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam-
mable oils that may cause fire.
• Before touching the battery, igni-
tion cables and electrical wiring,
you should disconnect the battery
"-" terminal. You may get an electric
shock from the electric current.
• When you remove the interior trim
cover with a flat head (-) driver, be
careful not to damage the cover.
• Be careful when you replace and
clean bulbs to avoid burns or elec-
trical shock.
Maintenance
7
7-7
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 7
7-8
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer at the frequen-
cies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check automatic transmission P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
Hot Coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 8
Maintenance
7
7-9
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-
age.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 9
7-10
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply,
follow Maintenance Under Severe
Usage Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal
temperature or less than 10 miles
(16 km)in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low
speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,
unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or
mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper,
or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 106 mile/h(170 km/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than
the following Normal Maintenance
Schedule. After 120 months or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) continue
to follow the prescribed maintenance
intervals.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 10
Maintenance
7
7-11
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized K900 Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other
additives.
*
2
: Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*
3
: Rear differential oil should be changed anytime rear
differential have been submerged in water.
*
4
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
or tension is reduced excessively.
*
5
: Use only the specified automatic transmission fluid.
(Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities"
in section 8 or the label in the engine room.)
*
6
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine
vibration and adjust if necessary.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 11
7-12
Maintenance
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pad, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pad
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 12
Maintenance
7
7-13
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 13
7-14
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 14
Maintenance
7
7-15
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect rear differential oil *
3
(40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 15
7-16
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 16
Maintenance
7
7-17
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect valve clearance (3.8L) *
6
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
4
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 17
7-18
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 18
Maintenance
7
7-19
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Inspect rear differential oil*
3
(80,000 miles (128,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 19
7-20
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 20
Maintenance
7
7-21
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
4
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 21
7-22
Maintenance
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 22
Maintenance
7
7-23
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Inspect rear differential oil *
3
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 23
7-24
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 24
Maintenance
7
7-25
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 25
7-26
Maintenance
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transmission fluid *
5
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump, belt and hoses
❑ Inspect rear differential oil *
3
(160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 192 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 26
Maintenance
7
7-27
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter R
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter I More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid R Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake disc /pads I More frequently C, D, G, H
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 27
7-28
Maintenance
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A- Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles
(16 km) in freezing temperature
B- Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long
distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or
salt- spread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materi-
als or in very cold weather
E- Driving in heavy dust condition
F - Driving in heavy traffic area
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or
vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K- Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
6 months
C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J
Rear differential oil R Every 80,000 miles (128,000 km) C, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R More frequently C, E
Propeller shaft I
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6
months
C, E
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 28
Maintenance
7
7-29
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Fuel filter
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a
lifetime fuel filter that integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance
or replacement is not needed but
depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like
fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, fuel
filter inspection or replace is needed.
The fuel filter be Inspected or
replaced by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized K900 Kia
dealer replace any damaged or leak-
ing parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 29
7-30
Maintenance
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
K900 Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
This is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
✽ NOTICE
■ NHTSA Safety Corrosion
Alert
NHTSA has warned all vehicle own-
ers of all brands that they must
maintain their vehicles in a manner
which will prevent brake hose and
brake line failures due to corrosion
when such vehicles are exposed to
winter road salt and related chemi-
cals. While serious corrosion condi-
tions typically only manifest them-
selves as safety issues after 7 years of
vehicle use, the corrosion process
starts immediately and thus under-
body cleaning maintenance must
commence from your vehicle's first
exposure to road salts and chemi-
cals.
(Continued)
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transmission fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 30
Maintenance
7
7-31
(Continued)
NHTSA urges vehicle owners to take
the following steps to prevent corro-
sion:
1.Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly throughout the
winter and do a thorough washing
in the spring to remove road salt
and other de-icing chemicals.
2.Monitor the brake system for
signs of corrosion by having regu-
lar professional inspections and
watching for signs of problems,
including loss of brake fluid,
unusual leaks and soft or spongy
feel in the brake pedal.
3.Replace the entire brake pipe
assembly if you find severe corro-
sion that causes scaling or flaking
of brake components.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, we rec-
ommend you to refer to the Kia web-
site.
(http://www.kia-hotline.com)
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 31
7-32
Maintenance
ENGINE OILCHECKING FLUID LEVELS
When checking engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid,
always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant or fluid. This is espe-
cially important in dusty or sandy
areas and when the vehicle is used
on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Checking the engine oil level
1.Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2.Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4.Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5.Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should be
between F and L.
Do not spill engine oil, when adding or
changing engine oil. If you spill engine
oil in the engine room, wipe it off imme-
diately.
Replacement Engine Oil
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
CAUTION
Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
WARNING
OKH075002N
OKH075085N
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 32
Maintenance
7
7-33
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this sec-
tion.
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
OKH075003N
OKH075086N
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 33
7-34
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
• Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cool-
ing system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise
to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating,
do not remove the radiator cap or
the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
Removing radia-
tor cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal injury
from escaping hot coolant or
steam.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 34
Maintenance
7
7-35
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If fre-
quent additions are required, see an
authorized K900 Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running. If
your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling
fan) may operate until you dis-
connect the negative battery
cable.
WARNING
OKH075004N
OKH075087N
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 35
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water, distilled water or
soft water for your vehicle and
never mix hard water in the coolant
filled at the factory. An improper
coolant mixture can result in seri-
ous malfunction or engine dam-
age.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
• 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix
is the easiest to mix together as it
will be same quantity of each and
can work reasonable for most situ-
ations.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
✽ NOTICE
If in doubt about mix ratio 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be
same quantity of each. It can work
reasonable for most temperature
range of -31°F and higher.
7-36
Maintenance
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
OKH075005N
OKH075088N
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 36
Maintenance
7
7-37
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the generator.
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure causing serious injury.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 37
7-38
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
or capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
CAUTION
Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
CAUTION
OKH075006N
OKH075089N
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 38
Maintenance
7
7-39
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking the power steering
fluid level
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the side of the gauge
at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steer-
ing fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
In the event the power steering sys-
tem requires frequent addition of
fluid, the vehicle should be inspected
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Too little fluid can result in increased
steering effort and/or noise from the
power steering system.
✽ NOTICE
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the gauge. If the
fluid is cold, check that it is in the
"COLD" range.
Use only the specified power steer-
ing fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants or capacities" in section
8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
damage and twists in the power
steering hose before driving.
Low power steering fluid
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate
the vehicle for prolonged peri-
ods with a low power steering
fluid level.
• Never start the engine when
the reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful
that dirt does not get into the
tank.
• The use of the non-specified
fluid could reduce the effective-
ness of the power steering sys-
tem and cause damage to it.
CAUTION
OKH073007N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:37 PM Page 39
7-40
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
OKH075008N
Windshield fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
WARNING
Flammable fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks. The wind-
shield washer fluid is flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. This can result in a fire.
WARNING
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 40
Maintenance
7
7-41
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
Main air cleaner
1.Lift the end of strip (1) up.
2.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out.
3.Lift the rear portion of small service
cover (2) up and then remove the
service cover.
(A) : for assemble
(B) : for remove
4.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out from main service cover (3).
5.Pull the main service cover over
0.28 in (7 mm) to toward the front
of the vehicle.
6.Lift the main service cover up and
then remove the main service
cover. Be careful not to damage
the holder under the main service
cover.
OKH075009N
OKH073010N
■ Main air cleaner
■ Chamber air cleaner
OKH073052N
OKH073051N
A
B
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 41
7-42
Maintenance
7.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
8.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
9.Replace the air cleaner filter.
10. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Chamber air cleaner
1.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
OKH073011N
OKH073053N
OKH073012N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 42
Maintenance
7
7-43
2.Replace the air cleaner filter after
pulling up the locking tab (1).
3.Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
OKH073013N
Air Filter Maintenance
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air clean-
er filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 43
7-44
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km). If the vehicle is operat-
ed in severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you replace the climate control air fil-
ter, replace it performing the follow-
ing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
Filter replacement
1.With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to allow
the glove box to hang freely on the
hinges.
2.Open the glove box and remove
the support strap.
OKH073015N
OKH073016N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 44
Maintenance
7
7-45
3.Remove the climate control air fil-
ter cover while pressing the lock on
the left side of the cover.
4.Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5.Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the fil-
ter may be reduced.
OKH073017N OBH078017
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 45
7-46
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
OKH073073N
Wiper Blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 46
Maintenance
7
7-47
Front windshield wiper blade
For your convenience, move the
windshield wiper blades to the serv-
ice position as follows;
Turn off the engine.
Move the wiper switch to the single
wiping (MIST) position within 20 sec-
onds and hold the switch until the
wiper blade is in the fully up position.
1.Raise the wiper arm.
2.Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift
up the blade clip.
3.Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
OKH073040N
OKH073074N
OKH073075N
OKH073076N
Wiper Arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 47
7-48
Maintenance
4.Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
5.Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
OKH073077N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 48
Maintenance
7
7-49
BATTERY
For best battery service
The battery is in the trunk.
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Make sure that the clear tube vent
hose is connected between the nip-
ple at the back side of the battery
and the vehicle body vent nipple.
This ensures that if battery vapors
occur that they will exit the vehicle
not remain in the trunk.
✽ NOTICE
The battery installed in the trunk of
your vehicle is practically mainte-
nance free.
Basically equipped battery is main-
tenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked
with LOWER and UPPER on the
side, you can check the electrolyte
level. The electrolyte level should be
between LOWER and UPPER. If
the electrolyte level is low, it needs to
add distilled (demineralized) water
(Never add sulfuric acid or other
electrolyte). When refill, be careful
not to splash the battery and adja-
cent components. And do not over-
fill the battery cells. It can cause cor-
rosion on other parts. After then
ensure that tighten the cell caps.
Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH075048N
Refilling battery
If your vehicle trunk is equipped
with a battery that is marked
LOWER and UPPER, you can
check the electrolyte levels to
ensure they are not too low. If
the electrolytes levels are low,
add distilled (demineralized)
water to the battery. Never add
sulfuric acid or other liquids
with electrolytes as this can
cause damage to the battery.
When refilling the battery, do
not spill any water on the bat-
tery or its adjacent components
as this can cause corrosion to
those components.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 49
7-50
Maintenance
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If elec-
trolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contact-
ed area. If you feel a pain or
a burning sensation, get
medical attention immediate-
ly.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
• Never attempt to recharge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are
connected.
Risk of Explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
other flames or sparks
away from battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
WARNING
Sulfuric acid in batteries
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 50
Maintenance
7
7-51
• When you don’t use the vehicle for
a long time in a low temperature
area, disconnect the battery and
keep it indoors.
The power trunk is not closed com-
pletely when the battery is
removed. When you remove the
battery from the vehicle, refer to
"Power trunk" in section 4.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent battery case from being
damaged in a low temperature
area.
• If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
✽ NOTICE
Removing the battery from the vehi-
cle should be done at an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
Risk of electrocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
WARNING
Recharging battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected. You can get
shocked by the battery.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 51
7-52
Maintenance
Battery recharging by battery
charger
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) bat-
teries are maintenance-free and
we recommend that the AGM bat-
tery be serviced by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer. For charging your
AGM battery, use only fully auto-
matic battery chargers that are
specially developed for AGM bat-
teries.
• When replacing the AGM battery,
we recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Battery recharging by vehicle
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, run the engine for 20-30 min-
utes at idle or driving the vehicle
before it is shutoff. Vehicle may not
restart if you shut it off before the
battery had chance to adequately
recharge.
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
AGM battery(if equipped)
Do not open or remove the cap
on top of the battery. This may
cause leaks of internal elec-
trolyte that could result in
severe injury.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 52
Maintenance
7
7-53
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2.Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3.Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
• Operation related to the battery
should be done at an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
• Power trunk (See section 4)
Battery in trunk
Your vehicle is equipped with a
battery in the trunk. For your
safety, avoid storing containers
with liquid in the trunk of the
vehicle. If the liquid leaks, this
could contact the battery and
create a risk of electrocution.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 53
7-54
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
All specifications (sizes and pressures)
can be found on a label attached to the
driver’s side center pillar.
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
OKH073078N
Tire underinflation
Inflate your tire consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe under inflation
can lead to severe heat buildup,
causing blowouts, tread separa-
tion and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 54
Maintenance
7
7-55
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than one
mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been dam-
aged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 55
7-56
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
✽ NOTICE
Remember to check the pressure of
your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every time
you check the pressure of the other
tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:38 PM Page 56
Maintenance
7
7-57
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽ NOTICE
The front tire size is different from
the rear tire size. So when you rotate
tires, check the tire and wheel size.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
OBH078040
OBK079038
■ 18 inch tire
■ 19 inch tire
Mixing Tires
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury.
WARNING
Wheel Weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 57
7-58
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
✽ NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally sup-
plied with the vehicles. If not, that
affects driving performance.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. Tire size can
affect wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
OKH073079N
Tread wear indicator
Wheels
Wheels that do not meet Kia’s
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 58
Maintenance
7
7-59
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
✽ NOTICE
The front tire size is different from
the rear tire size. So when you rotate
tires, check the tire and wheel size.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possi-
bly leading to personal injury or
death.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 59
7-60
Maintenance
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P245/45R19 98V
P- Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
245 - Tire width in millimeters.
45 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
98 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this sec-
tion for additional information.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 60
Maintenance
7
7-61
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
8.0JX19
8.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2017.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 61
7-62
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example: TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 62
Maintenance
7
7-63
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 63
7-64
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
Tire temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
• When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv-
ing, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or
curb stone, drive slowly so
that the tires and wheels are
not damaged.
• If the tire is impacted, inspect
the tire condition or contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000 km).
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 64
Maintenance
7
7-65
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see the tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information
on the tire sidewall.
Tire terminology and defini-
tions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmis-
sion, power seats, and air condition-
ing.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 65
7-66
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating:The load rat-
ing for a tire at the maximum permissi-
ble inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automo-
tive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5
lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previ-
ously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 66
Maintenance
7
7-67
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 67
7-68
Maintenance
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
• When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels.
• If snow chains must be used, use
the Auto Sock
®
(fabric snow chain).
• If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles (0.5~1.0 km).
* Auto Sock
®
is a trade mark of Auto
sock.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels (rear
wheels).
Be sure that the chains are installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 68
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended.
Any combinations of radial-ply and
bias-ply or bias belted tires when
used on the same vehicle will seri-
ously deteriorate vehicle handling.
The best rule to follow is: Identical
radial-ply tires should always be
used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Maintenance
7
7-69
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 69
7-70
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bol-
ster, another is in the engine com-
partment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and fusible link for higher
amperage ratings.
Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
electric wiring of the vehicle.
OKH073054N
Normal
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Fusible type
■ Multi fuse type
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
WARNING
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 70
Maintenance
7
7-71
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ depending on equipment/
options.
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1.Turn the Engine Start/Stop button
and all other switches off.
OKH073019N
■ Drive side panel
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay, make sure the new
fuse or relay fits tightly into
the clips. Failure to tightly
install the fuse or relay may
cause damage to the wiring
and electric systems.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts. The fuses,
relays and terminals may be
not be fastened correctly
which may cause vehicle
damage.
CAUTION
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system mal-
function.
CAUTION
Electrical Fire
Always ensure replacements
fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed. Failure
to do so can result in a vehicle
fire.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 71
7-72
Maintenance
2.Lift the end of strip (1) up.
3.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out.
4.Lift the rear portion of small service
cover (2) up and then remove the
service cover.
(A) : for assemble
(B) : for remove
5.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out from main service cover (3).
6.Pull the main service cover over
7mm (0.28 in) to toward the front of
the vehicle.
7.Lift the main service cover up and
then remove the main service
cover. Be careful not to damage
the holder under the main service
cover.
8.Open the fuse panel cover.
9.Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the fuse puller provided in
the engine compartment fuse
panel.
10. Check the removed fuse; replace
it if it is blown.
11. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tight-
ly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
OKH073052N
A
B
OKH073051N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 72
Maintenance
7
7-73
Fuse switch
Always put the transportation fuse
switch at the ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio and digital clock must be reset
and the smart key may not work
properly.
✽ NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, move the transportation fuse
switch to the OFF position to pre-
vent the battery being discharged.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1.Turn the Engine Start/Stop button
and all other switches off.
OKH073021N
OKH075022N
OKH075023N
• Always place the transporta-
tion fuse switch in the ON
position while driving the vehi-
cle.
• Do not move the transporta-
tion fuse switch repeatedly as
this may cause damage to the
fuse switch.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 73
7-74
Maintenance
2.Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
When the blade type fuse is dis-
connected, remove it by using the
clip designed for changing fuses
located in the engine room fuse
box. Upon removal, securely insert
reserve fuse of equal quantity.
3.Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4.Push in a new fuse of the same rat-
ing, and make sure it fits tightly in
the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1.Remove the fuse panel cover on
the right side in the engine com-
partment.
2.Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3.Replace the fuse with a new one of
the same rating.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH073080N
Fuse Panel Cover
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap
to ensure it is securely closed.
If the battery cap is not secure-
ly closed, moisture may enter
the system and damage the
electrical components.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 74
Maintenance
7
7-75
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1.Disassemble the negative cable of
battery.
2.Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3.Replace the fuse with a new one of
the same rating.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH075024N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 75
7-76
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OKH075049N
OKH073029N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 76
Maintenance
7
7-77
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
AUDIO 2 10A A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU
MODULE 3 10A
A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Seat Console Switch, Driver Haptic Control Module, Rear
CCS Control Module LH/RH, Driver/Passenger IMS Control Module, Driver Power Seat Module, Rear Seat
Warmer Control Module LH/RH, Rear Smart Junction Box (IPS Control Module)
MODULE 2 10A
Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module, LDWS Camera Module, Crash Pad Switch, Stop Lamp Switch, A/T Console
Switch, Electric Parking Brake Switch, Console Switch, Smart Cruse Control Radar, Air Sus, TPMS, PAS
SPARE 10A Spare
WIPER 10A Auto Light & Rain Sensor
MODULE 1 10A BCM, Trunk Lid Main Switch, Low Panel Switch
MEMORY 2 10A External Buzzer, Driver Smart Connector, Passenger Smart Connector
DRV HEAT 15A Driver Haptic Control Module, Driver CCS Module
PASS HEAT 15A Passenger CCS Module
WINDOW LH 30A Rear Power Window Module LH, Rear Power Window Module LH
HEADREST 15A Active Headrest Sensor
BCM 10A BCM, Multifunction Switch, Driver/Passenger Power Seat Switch, Rear Door Module LH/RH
EPB 2 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
P/HANDLE 15A Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 77
7-78
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
B/ALARM 10A BCM
INHIBITOR 1 10A
W/O Electric ATM Shift Lever : Sport Mode Switch
With Electric ATM Shift Lever : Electric ATM Shift Lever
P/DOOR DRV 15A Driver Door Latch
PASS P/SEAT 20A
W/O IMS : Passenger Seat Relay Box
With IMS : Passenger IMS Control Module
P/DOOR RR
LH
15A Rear Door Latch LH
DRV P/SEAT 30A Driver Lumbar Support Valve, Driver Lumbar Support Switch, Driver Power Seat Module
S/ROOF 2 10A Sunroof Motor
SMART KEY 2 10A Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (P/N Relay), Smart Key Control Module
S/ROOF 1 20A Sunroof Motor
START 10A Start/Stop Button Switch
MODULE 5 10A
Surround View Unit, Parking Guide Unit, Head-UP, Instrument Cluster, Driver Lumbar Support Valve, Rear Seat
Console Switch, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module LH/RH, Rear Massage Control Module LH/RH, Rear Smart
Junction Box (IPS Control Module)
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster, Head-Up Display
SMART KEY 1 25A Smart Key Control Module
DOOR LAMP 10A Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module
STR'G HTD 15A Clock Spring
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 78
Maintenance
7
7-79
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
MODULE 6 10A Smart Key Control Module, BCM
A/BAG 15A Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner, Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner, SRS Control Module
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster
IGN 1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (FUSE : F20, F21, F23, F25, F26, F27)
MEMORY 1 10A
Passenger IMS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Driver/Passenger Power Seat Switch, Rear
Door Module LH/RH, Power Trunk Module, Instrument Cluster, BCM, Security Sensor, Analogue Clock, A/C
Control Module, Head-Up Display
MULTI MEDIA 10A Keyboard, A/V Navigation Head Unit, Front Monitor, TMU
ROOM LAMP 10A
Rear Seat Foot Lamp LH/RH, Trunk Room Lamp LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Room Lamp, Overhead
Console Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Rear Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Garnish Lamp LH/RH,
Garnish Center Lamp, Glove Box Lamp
MEMORY 3 10A RF Receiver
EPB 1 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
SPARE 15A Spare
IGN 2 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (Fuse : F29, F30)
A/CON 1 10A A/C Control Module, Ionizer, Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (Blower Relay)
AFLS 15A Adaptive Front Lighting Module, HEAD LAMP LH/RH
SPARE 10A Spare
P/OUTLET FR 20A Front Cigarette Lighter
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 79
7-80
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
MODULE 4 10A
Electric ATM Shift Lever, Analogue Clock, BCM, Surround View Unit,
Overhead Console Lamp, Parking Guide Unit
AUDIO 1 10A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Front/Rear Monitor Module, Keyboard, Smart Key Control Module, Rear Seat
Audio Switch, AMP, TMU
SPARE 10A Spare
P/OUTLET RR 20A P/OUTLET RR, Front Power Outlet
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 80
Maintenance
7
7-81
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Driver’s side)
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OKH075025N
OKH075026N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 81
7-82
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Stop Lamp 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
Brake SW 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
AAF 10A Not Used
Injector 1 15A Injector Drive Box
SMK (IGN1) 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.5)
ESC 1 40A ESC Control Module
ALT 200A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (Fuse : F9, F15, F16, F18, F19), Alternator
Cooling 70A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.6)
SMK (IGN2) 30A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.3)
ESC 2 40A ESC Control Module
Diagnosis 25A Multipurpose Check Connector
H/Lamp Washer 25A Not Used
Battery 3 40A Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F5, F6, F8, F9, F10)
SMK (ACC) 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.9)
TCU 1 10A ECM, Transmission Range Switch, Transmission Park Postilion Sensor & Switch
ESC 3 10A Steering Angle Sensor, ESC Control Module
B/UP Lamp 1 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.4)
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 82
Maintenance
7
7-83
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Vaccum Pump 1 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.10), Vaccum Pump Switch
Vaccum Pump 2 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.10)
ECU 1 10A ECU
EHPS 1 10A EHPS Module
Inhibitor 2 10A A/T Console Switch, Electric ATM Shift Lever
Washer 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.8)
Wiper 2 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.1)
B/UP Lamp 2 10A
Back View Camera & Back-Up Lamp, A/T Console Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head
Unit
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 83
7-84
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Passenger’s side)
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OKH075027N
OKH073028N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 84
Maintenance
7
7-85
Fuse Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
METAL
CORE
BLOCK
(PCB #1)
Sensor 3 10A Rear Smart Junction Box (Fuel Pump Relay)
P/Door PASS 15A Passenger Door Latch
SPARE 15A Spare
Deicer 15A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Front Deicer Relay)
Ignition Coil 20A Ignition Coil #1~6, Ignition Coil #1~8, Condenser #1, #2
Horn 15A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Horn Relay)
Sensor 2 10A Mass Air Flow Sensor, Oxygen Sensor #1~4, E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.6)
Sensor 4 15A CMP Sensor #1~4
Wiper 3 30A Wiper Motor
ECU 3 30A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (ECU Main Relay)
ECS 2 40A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Air ECS Relay)
METAL
CORE
BLOCK
(PCB #2)
Sensor 1 15A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, ECM, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
Oil Control Valve #1~4
Injector 2 15A Injector #1~6, Injector #1~8
SPARE 10A Spare
SPARE 20A Spare
SPARE 10A Spare
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 85
7-86
Maintenance
Fuse Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
METAL
CORE
BLOCK
(PCB #2)
A/CON 2 10A A/C Control Module
Cruise 10A Smart Cruise Control Radar
TCU 2 15A TCM
ECU 2 10A ECM
Blower 40A Metal Core Block(PCB) (Blower Relay)
Start 1 30A E/R Fuse Relay Box LH (RLY.2)
MULTI
FUSE
Preactive Seat
Belt DRV
40A Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner
Preactive Seat
Belt PASS
40A Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner
Battery 2 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F13~20, F23, F24, F27, F28, IPS5~8, Arisu-LT2)
Battery 1 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F38, IPS1, 3, Arisu-LT1, Leak Current Autocut Device)
EHPS 2 80A EHPS Module
FUSE
Battery 4 60A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Fuse : F2, F4, F6, F10, F11, F12)
Battery 5 60A Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (Fuse : F7, F11)
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:39 PM Page 86
Maintenance
7
7-87
Trunk fuse panel
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of print-
ing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
OKH073043N
• Battery box fuse panel
OKH075042N
OKH075041N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 87
7-88
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Rear HTD 40A Rear Defogger Relay
P/WDW RH 30A Passenger Power Window Module, Rear Power Window Module RH
Power Trunk 30A Power Trunk Module
Fuel Pump 20A Fuel Pump Relay
P/Seat RR 1 20A Rear Seat Relay Box
ECS 1 20A ECS Unit
P/Seat PASS 15A Passenger IMS Control Module
P/Door RR RH 15A Rear Door Latch RH
Spare 15A Spare
Trunk 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Power Trunk Module Buzzer
Fog Lamp Rear 10A Rear Fog Lamp Relay
Spare 40A Spare
AMP 25A AMP
Spare 20A Spare
P/Seat RR 2 10A
Rear Seat Relay Box LH, Rear Seat Relay RH, Rear Seat Massage Control Module LH, Rear Seat Massage
Control Module RH
Spare 10A Spare
Trunk fuse panel
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 88
Maintenance
7
7-89
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Door Lock RH 10A Passenger Door Module, Rear Door Module RH
Door Lock LH 10A Driver Door Module, Rear Door Latch LH
S/Heater RR
RH
15A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module RH, Rear CCS Control Module RH
S/Heater RR
LH
15A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module LH, Rear CCS Control Module LH
Spare 15A Spare
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Start 2 40A Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (Fuse : F8, F9, F12)
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
Battery 6 100A Rear Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F10, F11, F13, F15, F17, F18, F19, F20)
Battery box fuse panel
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 89
7-90
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
• If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized K900 Kia
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the
headlight assembly to get to the
bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
• Do not install additional bulb or
LED. If you install that, the lamp
may not be operated properly and
fuse box or electric wiring system
may have problem.
✽ NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
ing, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition
is caused by the temperature differ-
ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con-
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Working on the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that Engine Start/Stop
button is in the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
WARNING
Light Replacement
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 90
Maintenance
7
7-91
Headlight, front position light,
front turn signal light, front fog
light bulb replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Front position light
(5) Front side marker light
(6) Daytime running light
(7) Front fog light
Headlight bulb
OKH075044N
■ Type A (LED)
OKH073044N
■ Type B (HID)
OKH073081N
Halogen bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce frag-
ment of glass if broken.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 91
7-92
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Headlamp (HID/ LED type), front
position lamp, front turn signal
lamp, front fog lamp
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is equipped with
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlights, these headlights contain
mercury. So if you need to have your
vehicle disposed, you should remove
the HID Headlights before disposal.
The removed HID headlights should
be recycled, re-used or disposed as
hazardous waste.
HID Headlight low beam
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 92
Maintenance
7
7-93
✽ NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer
to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their
frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point
in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the
same manner as halogen incandes-
cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out
after a period of operation but will
immediately relight when the head-
lamp switch is cycled it is likely the
HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lighting components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen
bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
Side repeater light bulb
replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer. A skilled
technician should check or repair the
side repeater light, for it may damage
related electrical parts and housing
of outside mirror.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
OKH073031N
OKH075032N
OKH075057N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 93
7-94
Maintenance
(3) Back-up light
(4) Stop light
(5) Rear side marker light
(6) Reflex reflector
Stop and tail light, Turn signal
light, Back-up light, Rear side
marker light
If the light does not operate, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
High mounted stop light
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend the vehicle be checked
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
A skilled technician should check or
repair the high mounted stop light,
for it may affect the performance of
the curtain airbags or damage relat-
ed interior parts of the vehicle.
License plate lamp replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend the vehicle be checked
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
A skilled technician should check or
repair the license plate light, for it
may affect damage related interior
and exterior parts of the vehicle.
OKH073033N
OKH073082N
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 94
Maintenance
7
7-95
Interior light bulb replacement
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior
light housing.
2.Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3.Install a new bulb in the socket.
4.Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
5.If the map lamp and room lamp are
not operating, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
OKH073036N
OKH075035N
■ Glove box lamp
■ Trunk lamp
Interior Lights
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
WARNING
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 95
7-96
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
• Do not use strong soap,
chemical detergents or hot
water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle
is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:40 PM Page 96
Maintenance
7
7-97
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
OKH073050N
Wetting Engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing is not
recommended. It may cause
the failure of electrical circuits
or engine and related part
located in the engine com-
partment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents and the air duct inside
the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 97
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier
between your paint and contaminate.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Drying Vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
7-98
Maintenance
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 98
Maintenance
7
7-99
Underbody maintenance
Road salt and other corrosive chem-
icals are used in cold weather states
to melt snow and prevent ice accu-
mulation. If these chemicals are not
regularly removed, they will corrode
the vehicle underbody and over time
damage fuel lines, the fuel tank
retention system, the vehicle sus-
pension, the exhaust system, and
even the body frame. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
has warned all vehicle owners of all
brands of the need to take the follow-
ing steps:
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter
and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for cor-
rosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visually
aware of corrosion flaking or scal-
ing or if you become aware of a
change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongy brakes, flu-
ids leaking, impairment of direc-
tional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 99
7-100
Maintenance
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the long-
term corrosion resistance your vehi-
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
tion and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the car.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your car clean and free of mud
or accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible
surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 100
Maintenance
7
7-101
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent it.
Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your car in the garage or drive it into
the garage when it is still wet or cov-
ered with snow, ice or mud. Even a
heated garage can contribute to cor-
rosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 101
7-102
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. See the
instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
Taking care of leather seats
• Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage
of the leather and maintain its qual-
ity.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
• Sufficient use of a leather protec-
tive may prevent abrasion of the
cover and helps maintain the color.
Be sure to read the instructions
and consult a specialist when
using leather coating or protective
agents.
• Leather with bright colors(beige,
cream beige) is easily contaminat-
ed and clear in appearance. Clean
the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
Cleaning the leather seats
• Remove all contaminates instantly.
Refer to instructions below for
removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic products(sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
- Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated point.
Wipe off the cream with a wet
cloth and remove water with a dry
cloth.
• Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)
- Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contam-
inations do not smear.
•Oil
- Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover for natural leather
only.
Electrical components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION
Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 102
Maintenance
7
7-103
• Chewing gum
- Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Fabric seat cover using precau-
tions (If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats regu-
larly with a vacuum cleaner in con-
sideration of fabric material charac-
teristics. If they are heavily soiled
with beverage stains, etc., use a suit-
able interior cleaner. To prevent dam-
age to seat covers, wipe off the seat
covers down to the seams with a
large wiping motion and moderate
pressure using a soft sponge or
microfiber cloth.
Velcro closures on clothing or sharp
objects may cause snagging or
scratches on the surface of the
seats. Make sure not to rub such
objects against the surface.
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
✽ NOTICE
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
Rear Window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 103
7-104
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 104
Maintenance
7
7-105
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the
engine intake manifold through the
purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or perform-
ance problems resulting from any
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
• Use of unauthorized electric
devices may cause: Abnormal
vehicle operation, Wire damage,
Battery discharge, Fire.
Be careful not to damage your
vehicle by use of unauthorized
electric devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 105
7-106
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 106
Maintenance
7
7-107
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the engine off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the engine off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
WARNING
Catalytic converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
WARNING
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 107
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag infla-
tors, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry
batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
Maintenance
7-108
KH USA 7:2018 4/14/2017 6:41 PM Page 108
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions.........................................................8-2
Engine.................................................................8-2
Bulb wattage.......................................................8-3
Air conditioning system.......................................8-4
Weight/volume....................................................8-4
Tires and wheels.................................................8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities...........8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number....................8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN).....................8-9
Vehicle certification label ....................................8-9
Tire specification and pressure label................8-10
Engine number .................................................8-10
Refrigerant label ...............................................8-10
Consumer assistance (U.S only)......................8-11
Electrical equipment (U.S only)........................8-14
Reporting safety defects (U.S only)..................8-15
Online factory authorized manuals (U.S only)......8-15
8
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 1
8-2
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
DIMENSIONS
Item in (mm)
Overall length 200.59 (5,095)
Overall width 74.80 (1,900)
Overall height 58.46 (1,485)
Front tread
P245/50 R18 63.62 (1,616)
P245/45 R19 63.78 (1,620)
Rear tread
P245/50 R18 64.33 (1,634)
P275/40 R19 64.06 (1,627)
Wheelbase 119.88 (3,045)
Item 3.8L 5.0L
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
230.54 (3,778)
307.3 (5,038)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.78x3.42 (96x87)
3.78x3.42 (96x87)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
1-2-7-8-4-5-6-3
No. of cylinders 6, V - type
8, V - type
ENGINE
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 2
BULB WATTAGE
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-3
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
LED Type
Headlamps (Low) LED LED
Headlamps (High) LED LED
HID Type
Headlamps (Low) 35 D3S
Headlamps (High) 60 9005HL+
Side marker lamps LED LED
Front turn signal lamps LED LED
Front position lamps LED LED
Front fog lamps LED LED
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror) LED LED
Puddle lamps LED LED
Daytime running lamps LED LED
Rear
Rear Stop/tail lamps (Inside/outside) LED LED
Rear Stop lamps (Inside/outside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps
(Inside/outside)
LED LED
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamps LED LED
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 3
8-4
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Interior
Map lamps LED
LED
Room lamps LED LED
Vanity mirror lamps LED LED
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Door courtesy lamps LED LED
Foot lamps LED LED
Mood lamps LED LED
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
Item Gasoline 3.8 Gasoline 5.0
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
5,357 (2,430) 5,622 (2,550)
Luggage volume
cu ft (l)
15.9 (450) 15.9 (450)
WEIGHT/VOLUME
ITEM Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant 650±25g R-134a
Compressor lubricant 120±10g PAG
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 4
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-5
TIRES AND WHEELS
✽ NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 3psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-
check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please
check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 1.5psi/km
* Normal load : Up to 3 persons
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque
lbf•ft (kgf•m, N•m)
Normal load * Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
P245/50R18 7.5JX18 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)
65~79
(9~11, 88~107)
P245/45R19 8.0JX19 210 (31) - 210 (31) -
P275/40R19 9.0JX19 - 210 (31) - 210 (31)
Compact spare tire
T155/80R18 4.0TX18 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T155/70R19 4.0TX19 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
CAUTION
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 5
8-6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends (or equivalent)
3.8L
6.45 US qt. (6.1 l)
ILSAC GF-5 or above APISN or above
ACEA A5 or above
5.0L
7.61 US qt. (7.2 l)
ILSAC GF-5 or above APISN or above
ACEA A5 or above
Automatic transmission fluid
10.14 US qt. (9.6 l)
ATF SP-IV-RR
Power steering fluid
0.95 US qt. (0.9 l)
Pentosin CHF 202
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-7
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute
to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements
are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL, ILSAC GF-3, ACEA
A3.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
3.8L
9.1 US qt. (8.6 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
5.0L
11.4 US qt. (10.8 l)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l)
DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil
1.48 US qt. (1.4 l)
Hypoid gear oil MS 517-15, SAE 75W/85
Fuel
19.81 US gal. (75 l)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 7
8-8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change.
Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
10W-30
5W-30
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. An engine oil displaying this API Certification Mark conforms to the
international Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). It
is recommended to only use engine oils that uphold this API
Certification Mark.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger’s seat. To
check the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
OKH083004N
VIN label
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OKH083001N
Frame number
OKH083002N
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 9
8-10
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
The refrigerant label is located on
the underside of the hood.
The label contains the following infor-
mation:
• Type of refrigerant
• Amount of refrigerant
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL
OKH073055N
OKH073078N
OKH085006N
OKH083005N
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 10
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current
model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv-
ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-
service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60
months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to
the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia
Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable
to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other
benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment,
the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre-
quency or type of occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed
from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday
and is accessible by dialing 1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-
2847) or 1-800-333-4KIA (800-333-4542).
For more information regarding assistance available,
please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24
hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing
1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-2847) or 1-800-333-4KIA (800-
333-4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time
of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your
vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri-
ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur-
ance card.
Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require
a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia
Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some-
one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire
with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to
allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access
to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should
you become locked out of your Kia.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-
cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s
Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to
transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an
alternative service location.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-11
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 11
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport
vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv-
ice. In the event that Kia does not have a dealer or an
alternative service location available in a particular loca-
tion, Kia will work with a reputable local service facility to
ensure that you receive prompt service. Warranty repairs
are performed at no cost.
24-hour Roadside Assistance is a service plan provided
by Kia Motors America, Inc. Certain limitations apply.
Coverage details are available in the Kia Warranty and
Consumer Information Manual.
✽ NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any
Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal-
vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s
law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by
a financial institution or insurance company.
Trip interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the
event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more
than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require
more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-
ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle
expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100
per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident.
You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to
obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia
Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip
interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the
necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,
expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or
other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under
Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.
8-12
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 12
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,
you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in
that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle
in a foreign country, you may experience the following
problems and should therefore consider the possibility of
having to deal with them:
1.The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause
damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and
other fuel-related parts which may not be covered
under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2.We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave
the country in which you purchased your Kia new and
register it in another country, problems arising from the
use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject
to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours
may not be marketed in the new country of registration,
parts, servicing techniques and tools necessary to
maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical
specifications required by the government may vary
enough from the country of purchase to cause addi-
tional problems.
3.There may not be an Authorized K900 Kia Dealer in the
area in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may
additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services in
a foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-
lems that result from unsatisfactory service, certain incor-
rect or misleading information or lack of service received
or provided outside the United.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-13
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 13
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-
form under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However, before any additional electrical equipment is
installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized K900 Kia
Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-
ranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is
installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-
cle, including such systems as the engine control system,
the audio system and the electrical charging system and
thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may
incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its
components or systems that may result from the installa-
tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,
or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,
or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other
electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid
damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized K900 Kia
Dealer concerning the proper equipment and installation.
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to
meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read
and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu-
larly the information under the headings "NOTICE",
"CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions
regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and
defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer
Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-2847) or
1-800-333-4KIA (800-333-4542).
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
8-14
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 14
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; download the
SaferCar mobile application; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safer-
car.gov.
The following publications are available on
www.KiaTechinfo.com
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-
cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It
is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under-
stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-
ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical
circuit in your vehicle.
Owner's manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating
procedures for the vehicle.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
8-15
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS
(U.S. ONLY)
KH USA 8:2018 4/14/2017 6:44 PM Page 15
Index
I
Index
I
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 1
A/V mode.......................................................................4-75
Advanced Smart Cruise Control System (ASCC).........5-67
Speed setting (ASCC)...............................................5-68
To convert to cruise control mode.............................5-76
Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC) .............5-72
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System)....................4-132
Air bag warning label....................................................3-63
Air bag warning light.....................................................3-43
Air bags..........................................................................3-40
Air bag warning label................................................3-63
Air bag warning light................................................3-43
Curtain air bag...........................................................3-56
Driver's and passenger's front air bag .......................3-52
Occupant detection system........................................3-46
Side air bag................................................................3-54
SRS Care...................................................................3-62
Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped Vehicle...........................................3-62
SRS components and functions ................................3-43
Air cleaner .....................................................................7-41
Air ventilation seat ......................................................4-172
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system ..........................4-144
Alarm system.................................................................4-13
Antenna........................................................................4-181
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-41
Appearance care.............................................................7-95
Exterior care..............................................................7-95
Interior care.............................................................7-102
Armrest (rear) ................................................................3-19
ASCC/LDWS mode.......................................................4-75
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN)..................4-181
Auto door lock/unlock feature.......................................4-20
Auto Hold ......................................................................5-36
Auto light/AFLS position............................................4-131
Automatic climate control system...............................4-144
Air conditioning......................................................4-153
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................4-145
Manual heating and air conditioning ......................4-146
Automatic transmission (Shift by cable).......................5-11
Manual mode.............................................................5-13
Shift-lock override.....................................................5-15
Automatic transmission (Shift by wire) ........................5-16
Manual mode.............................................................5-20
When the battery is discharged.................................5-22
Automatic turn off function ........................................4-139
Autonomus Emergency Braking (AEB)........................5-49
AEB Operation..........................................................5-49
To cancel the AEB.....................................................5-51
Warning light and message .......................................5-52
Aux, USB and iPod® port...........................................4-180
Bag hanger...................................................................4-177
I-2
Index
A
B
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 2
Battery............................................................................7-49
Battery replacement (for smart key)................................4-9
Battery saver function..................................................4-129
Before driving..................................................................5-4
Blind Spot Detection System(BSD)..............................5-86
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).....................................5-87
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert).................................5-90
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free...............4-182
Brake system..................................................................5-27
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)...................5-49
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)..................................5-41
Auto Hold..................................................................5-37
Electric parking brake (EPB)....................................5-31
Electronic stability control (ESC).............................5-43
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ..................................5-47
Power brakes .............................................................5-27
Brakes fluid....................................................................7-38
Bulb replacement...........................................................7-89
Bulb wattage....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button.................5-6
Camera see the Rear-Camera Display.........................4-122
Capacities (Lubricants)....................................................8-6
Care
Exterior care..............................................................7-96
Interior care.............................................................7-102
Tire care.....................................................................7-54
Center console storage.................................................4-164
Central door lock switch................................................4-19
Certification label ........................................................5-108
Chains - Tire ................................................................5-101
Checking tire inflation pressure.....................................7-55
Child restraint system....................................................3-32
Lower anchor system ................................................3-37
Seat belt.....................................................................3-33
Child-protector rear door lock.......................................4-20
Climate control additional features .............................4-163
Cluster ionizer.........................................................4-163
Smart ventilation.....................................................4-163
Climate control air filter................................................7-44
Clock............................................................................4-174
Clothes hanger.............................................................4-175
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ...............4-67
Compact spare tire.........................................................6-24
Compact spare tire replacement ....................................7-59
Consumer assistance(U.S. only)....................................8-11
Coolant...........................................................................7-34
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant..................................7-34
Crankcase emission control system.............................7-102
Cruise control system ....................................................5-62
To set cruise control speed........................................5-63
Cup holder ...................................................................4-168
Curtain air bag...............................................................3-56
Index
I-3
I
C
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 3
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination ...............................................................4-68
Dashboard, see instrument cluster.................................4-67
Daytime running light .................................................4-130
Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-158
Defogging logic...........................................................4-159
Defroster ......................................................................4-143
Outside rearview mirror defroster ..........................4-143
Rear window defroster............................................4-143
Wiper deicer ............................................................4-143
Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-158
Dimensions ......................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination ....4-68
Displays, see instrument cluster ....................................4-67
Door courtesy lamp .....................................................4-141
Door locks......................................................................4-16
Auto door lock/unlock feature ..................................4-19
Central door lock switch...........................................4-18
Child-protector rear door lock ..................................4-20
Impact sensing door unlock system..........................4-19
Power Door Latch.....................................................4-17
Rear door lock button................................................4-18
DRIVE mode.................................................................5-54
Conditions that limit active ECO MODE.................5-55
DRIVE MODE indicator screen...............................5-58
ECO MODE driving .................................................5-55
Drive mode integrated control system...........................5-54
DRIVE mode / SNOW mode....................................5-54
Driver Information System (DIS)................................4-180
Driver position memory system.......................................3-8
Driver's and passenger's front air bag............................3-52
Driving at night..............................................................5-97
Driving in flooded areas ................................................5-98
Driving in the rain..........................................................5-98
Driving off-road.............................................................5-99
Economical operation....................................................5-94
Electric chromic mirror (ECM).....................................4-48
Electric parking brake (EPB).........................................5-31
Electrical equipment(U.S. only)....................................8-14
Electronic stability control (ESC) .................................5-43
Emergency starting ..........................................................6-5
Jump starting...............................................................6-5
Emergency while driving.................................................6-3
Emission control system..............................................7-104
Crankcase emission control system ........................7-104
Evaporative emission control System.....................7-104
Exhaust emission control system............................7-105
Engine..............................................................................8-2
Engine compartment........................................................2-7
Engine coolant...............................................................7-34
Engine Coolant Temperature guage ..............................4-70
I-4
Index
E
D
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 4
Engine number...............................................................8-10
Engine oil.......................................................................7-32
Engine overheats..............................................................6-9
Engine start/stop button...................................................5-6
Engine start/stop button position.................................5-6
Illuminated engine start/stop button............................5-6
Engine start/stop button illumination ..............................5-6
Engine start/stop button position.....................................5-6
Engine will not start.........................................................6-4
Evaporative emission control System..........................7-104
Exhaust emission control system.................................7-105
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...............7-29
Exterior care...................................................................7-96
Exterior overview.............................................................2-2
Flat tire ..........................................................................6-17
Changing tires ...........................................................6-19
Compact spare tire ....................................................6-24
Jack and tools............................................................6-17
Jack label...................................................................6-27
Removing and storing the spare tire.........................6-18
Floor mat anchor(s) .....................................................4-175
Fluid
Brakes fluid...............................................................7-38
Power steering fluid ..................................................7-39
Washer fluid ..............................................................7-40
Front blind spot monitoring system.............................4-126
Front fog light..............................................................4-135
Front lamp switch........................................................4-139
Front seat adjustment - power .........................................3-5
Fuel Economy................................................................4-96
Fuel filler lid..................................................................4-37
Emergency fuel filler lid release...............................4-39
Fuel Gauge.....................................................................4-69
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-3
Fuse switch ....................................................................7-72
Fuses ..............................................................................7-70
Fuse switch................................................................7-72
Fuse/relay panel description......................................7-76
Instrument panel fuse................................................7-71
Main fuse...................................................................7-74
Multi fuse..................................................................7-75
Gauges ...........................................................................4-69
Glove box.....................................................................4-165
Glove box lamp............................................................4-142
Gross vehicle weight........................................................8-4
Index
I-5
I
F
G
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 5
I-6
Index
Hazard warning flasher....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions........................................5-96
Head Up Display (HUD).............................................4-115
Head Up Display Information.................................4-116
Head Up Display ON/OFF......................................4-116
Head Up Display Setting ........................................4-117
Head Up Display Information .....................................4-116
Head Up Display ON/OFF..........................................4-116
Head Up Display Setting.............................................4-117
Headlight bulb replacement...........................................7-90
Headlight escort function ...........................................4-129
Headlight leveling device ............................................4-135
Headlight position........................................................4-131
Headrest(front).................................................................3-9
Headrest(rear) ................................................................3-17
Heated steering wheel....................................................4-46
Heater
Automatic climate control system ..........................4-144
High - beam operation.................................................4-133
Hight adjustment (front seat belt)..................................3-24
Highway driving ............................................................5-99
Hill-start assist control (HAC).......................................5-46
HomeLink
®
system........................................................4-48
Hood...............................................................................4-35
Horn...............................................................................4-47
HUD see the Head Up Display ...................................4-116
Immobilizer system .......................................................4-11
Impact sensing door unlock system...............................4-19
Indicator light...............................................................4-109
Information Mode..........................................................4-76
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................4-48
Inside rearview mirror with compass ............................4-48
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-67
Gauges.......................................................................4-69
Instrument panel illumination...................................4-68
LCD Display Control................................................4-68
Transaxle Shift Indicator...........................................4-72
Instrument panel fuse.....................................................7-71
Instrument panel overview...............................................2-5
Interior care..................................................................7-102
Interior features............................................................4-168
Air ventilation seat .................................................4-172
Bag hanger ..............................................................4-177
Clock .......................................................................4-174
Clothes hanger.........................................................4-175
Cup holder...............................................................4-168
Floor mat anchor(s).................................................4-175
Luggage net (holder)...............................................4-177
Power outlet.............................................................4-169
Rear curtain.............................................................4-178
Rear vanity mirror...................................................4-176
Seat warmer.............................................................4-171
IH
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 6
Index
I-7
I
Side curtain..............................................................4-179
Sunvisor...................................................................4-169
Interior light.................................................................4-139
Automatic turn off function ...................................4-139
Door courtesy lamp.................................................4-141
Front lamp switch....................................................4-139
Glove box lamp.......................................................4-142
Rear lamp switch.....................................................4-140
Trunk room lamp.....................................................4-141
Vanity mirror lamp..................................................4-142
Interior overview .............................................................2-4
Jack and tools.................................................................6-17
Jack label .......................................................................6-27
Jump starting....................................................................6-5
Label
Air bag warning label................................................3-62
Certification label....................................................5-108
Refrigerant label........................................................8-10
Tire and loading information label..........................5-105
Tire sidewall labeling................................................7-60
Tire specification and pressure label.........................8-10
Lane change signals.....................................................4-134
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) .....................5-82
Lap/shoulder belt (3-Point system) ...............................3-23
LCD display...................................................................4-73
A/V mode..................................................................4-75
ASCC/LDWS mode..................................................4-75
Information Mode .....................................................4-75
LCD modes ...............................................................4-73
Trip computer mode..................................................4-74
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode........................................4-74
User Settings Mode...................................................4-78
Warning Messages.....................................................4-85
LCD Display Control.....................................................4-68
LCD modes....................................................................4-73
Light bulbs.....................................................................7-90
Lighting........................................................................4-129
Battery saver function .............................................4-129
Daytime running light ............................................4-130
Front fog light .........................................................4-135
Headlight escort function .......................................4-129
Headlight leveling device........................................4-135
High - beam operation ............................................4-133
Lane change signals ................................................4-134
Lighting control.......................................................4-130
Turn signals.............................................................4-134
Lighting control...........................................................4-130
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) ...............4-132
Auto light/AFLS position........................................4-131
Headlight position...................................................4-131
J
L
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 7
I-8
Index
Parking light position..............................................4-131
Lubricants and capacities.................................................8-6
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................4-177
Luggage volume ..............................................................8-4
Main fuse.......................................................................7-74
Maintenance.....................................................................7-5
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items...........7-29
Maintenance services ..................................................7-5
Normal maintenance schedule ..................................7-11
Owner maintenance.....................................................7-8
Tire maintenance.......................................................7-59
Maintenance schedule....................................................7-11
Manual mode - Automatic transmission
(Shift by cable)..........................................................5-13
Manual mode - Automatic transmission
(Shift by wire)...........................................................5-20
Map pocket ..................................................................4-167
Mechanical key operations............................................4-10
Mirrors...........................................................................4-48
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ................................4-48
HomeLink
®
system...................................................4-48
Inside rearview mirror...............................................4-48
Inside rearview mirror with compass........................4-48
Outside rearview mirror............................................4-63
Moonroof, see Panoramic sunroof.................................4-40
Multi fuse.......................................................................7-75
Multimedia system.......................................................4-180
Antenna ...................................................................4-182
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN).............4-181
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port.......................................4-180
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free ..........4-182
Driver Information System (DIS) ...........................4-181
Steering wheel audio control .................................4-183
USB charger ...........................................................4-180
Non-Powered Trunk.......................................................4-21
Normal maintenance schedule.......................................7-11
Occupant detection system............................................3-45
Odometer .......................................................................4-72
ODS see the Occupant detection system.......................3-45
Oil (Engine)...................................................................7-32
One time driving information mode..............................4-99
Outside rearview mirror.................................................4-63
Adjusting outside rearview mirror............................4-64
Folding the outside rearview mirror..........................4-65
Reverse parking aid function ....................................4-65
Outside Temperature Gauge ..........................................4-72
Overheats.........................................................................6-9
M
N
O
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 8
Panoramic sunroof.........................................................4-40
Sunroof open warning...............................................4-40
Parking assist system...................................................4-118
Non-operational conditions.....................................4-120
Operation.................................................................4-118
Parking Guide System.................................................4-124
Parking light position...................................................4-131
Power brakes..................................................................5-27
Power Door Latch..........................................................4-17
Power outlet.................................................................4-169
Power Trunk...................................................................4-22
Power window lock button............................................4-34
Pre-active Seat belt (PSB) ............................................3-28
Pre-tensioner seat belt....................................................3-26
Rear curtain..................................................................4-178
Rear door lock button....................................................4-18
Rear lamp switch.........................................................4-140
Rear seat adjustment (Power seat).................................3-13
Rear seat storage..........................................................4-165
Rear vanity mirror........................................................4-176
Rear-Camera Display...................................................4-122
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-54
Recommended lubricants and capacities.........................8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number........................8-8
Record your key number .................................................4-4
Refrigerant label ............................................................8-10
Remote keyless entry system operations.........................4-7
Replacement light bulb..................................................7-90
Reporting safety defects(U.S. only) ..............................8-15
Restrictions in handling keys.........................................4-10
Road warning...................................................................6-2
Rocking the vehicle.......................................................5-96
Rotation (Tire) ...............................................................7-55
Scheduled maintenance service.....................................7-10
Seat belt Precautions......................................................3-29
Seat belt warning...........................................................3-21
Seat belts........................................................................3-21
Hight adjustment (front seat belt).............................3-24
Lap/shoulder belt (3-Point system)...........................3-23
Pre-active Seat belt (PSB) ........................................3-29
Pre-tensioner seat belt...............................................3-26
Seat belt Precautions.................................................3-30
Seat belt warning.......................................................3-22
Seat warmer.................................................................4-171
Seatback pocket ..........................................................4-166
Seats.................................................................................3-2
Armrest (rear)............................................................3-19
Driver position memory system..................................3-8
Index
I-9
I
P
R
S
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 9
Front seat adjustment - power.....................................3-5
Headrest(front) ............................................................3-9
Rear seat adjustment (Power seat)............................3-14
Shift-lock override - Automatic transmission
(Shift by cable)..........................................................5-15
Side air bag....................................................................3-53
Side curtain..................................................................4-179
Smart Key ........................................................................4-4
Battery replacement ....................................................4-9
Immobilizer system...................................................4-11
Mechanical key operations........................................4-10
Record your key number.............................................4-4
Remote keyless entry system operations ....................4-7
Restrictions in handling keys....................................4-10
Smart key functions.....................................................4-4
Smart key precautions.................................................4-6
Transmitter precautions...............................................4-8
Smart key functions.........................................................4-4
Smart key precautions......................................................4-6
Smart Trunk...................................................................4-27
Smooth cornering...........................................................5-97
SNOW mode..................................................................5-54
Snow tires ....................................................................5-100
Spare tire
Changing tires ...........................................................6-19
Compact spare tire ....................................................6-24
Compact spare tire replacement................................7-59
Special driving conditions .............................................5-96
Driving at night .........................................................5-97
Driving in flooded areas............................................5-98
Driving in the rain.....................................................5-98
Driving off-road ........................................................5-99
Hazardous driving conditions ...................................5-96
Highway driving........................................................5-99
Rocking the vehicle...................................................5-96
Smooth cornering......................................................5-97
Speedometer...................................................................4-69
SRS Care........................................................................3-61
SRS components and functions.....................................3-43
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start..................6-4
Starting the engine...........................................................5-9
Starting the engine with a smart key...........................5-9
Starting the engine - With a smart key............................5-9
Steering wheel ...............................................................4-45
Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)..........4-45
Heated steering wheel...............................................4-46
Horn...........................................................................4-47
Tilt and telescopic steering........................................4-45
Steering wheel audio control ......................................4-182
Storage compartment...................................................4-164
Center console storage ............................................4-164
Glove box................................................................4-165
Map pocket..............................................................4-167
Rear seat storage .....................................................4-165
Seatback pocket ......................................................4-166
Sunglass holder .......................................................4-166
I-10
Index
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 10
Sunglass holder............................................................4-166
Sunroof open warning ...................................................4-40
Sunvisor .......................................................................4-169
Surround View Monitoring System (SVM).................4-127
Tachometer.....................................................................4-69
Tether anchorage system................................................3-37
Theft-alarm system........................................................4-13
Tilt and telescopic steering............................................4-45
Tire and loading information label..............................5-105
Tire chains....................................................................5-101
Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................6-11
Tire rotation ...................................................................7-56
Tire specification and pressure label.............................8-10
Tires and wheels ..............................................................8-5
Checking tire inflation pressure................................7-55
Compact spare tire replacement................................7-59
Low aspect ratio tire..................................................7-64
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures..............7-54
Tire care.....................................................................7-54
Tire maintenance.......................................................7-59
Tire replacement........................................................7-58
Tire rotation...............................................................7-56
Tire sidewall labeling................................................7-66
Tire traction...............................................................7-59
Wheel alignment and tire balance.............................7-57
Wheel replacement....................................................7-59
Towing ...........................................................................6-28
Emergency towing.....................................................6-31
Removable towing hook............................................6-30
Trailer Towing ...............................................................5-97
Transaxle Shift Indicator ...............................................4-72
Transmission - Automatic transmission
(Shift by cable)..........................................................5-11
Transmission - Automatic transmission
(Shift by wire)...........................................................5-16
Transmitter precautions ...................................................4-8
Trip A/B.........................................................................4-98
Trip computer ................................................................4-96
Fuel Economy ...........................................................4-96
One time driving information mode .........................4-99
Trip A/B.....................................................................4-98
Trip computer mode ......................................................4-74
Trunk..............................................................................4-21
Emergency trunk safety release ................................4-26
Non-Powered Trunk..................................................4-21
Power Trunk..............................................................4-22
Smart Trumk..............................................................4-27
Trunk Lid Control Button ........................................4-25
Trunk Lid Control Button .............................................4-25
Trunk room lamp.........................................................4-141
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode............................................4-75
Turn signals..................................................................4-134
Index
I-11
I
T
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 11
USB charger ................................................................4-179
User Settings Mode .......................................................4-78
Vanity mirror lamp.......................................................4-142
Vehicle break-in process .................................................1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders.............1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN)...............................8-9
Vehicle load limit.........................................................5-105
Certification label....................................................5-108
Tire and loading information label..........................5-105
Vehicle weight .............................................................5-110
Warning light ...............................................................4-100
Warning Messages.........................................................4-85
Washer fluid...................................................................7-40
Welcome system ..........................................................4-128
Headlight.................................................................4-128
Interior light ............................................................4-128
Puddle lamp.............................................................4-128
Wheel alignment and tire balance .................................7-57
Wheel replacement ........................................................7-59
Windows ........................................................................4-31
Power window lock button........................................4-34
Windshield defrosting and defogging..........................4-158
Windshield washers .....................................................4-138
Windshield wipers .......................................................4-136
Winter driving..............................................................5-100
Snow tires................................................................5-100
Tire chains...............................................................5-101
Wiper blades ..................................................................7-46
Wipers and washers .....................................................4-136
Windshield washers.................................................4-138
Windshield wipers...................................................4-136
I-12
Index
U
V
W
KH USA Index:2018 4/18/2017 10:39 AM Page 12
7
